Im01e21a02 02en

User’s
Manual ADMAG TI Series

AXG, AXW
Magnetic Flowmeter
HART Communication Type
IM 01E21A02-02EN
IM 01E21A02-02EN
4th Edition
1
ADMAG TI Series
AXG, AXW Magnetic Flowmeter
HART Communication Type
IM 01E21A02-02EN 4th Edition
Contents
1. Introduction....................................................................................................6
1.1 For Safe Use of Product....................................................................................... 9
1.2 Warranty............................................................................................................... 11
2. Operation by Display unit.......................................................................... 12
2.1 Basic Operating Procedures............................................................................. 12
2.2 Display and Basic Configuration...................................................................... 13
2.2.1 Display Configuration........................................................................... 13
2.2.2 Operation Level.................................................................................... 16
2.3 Display Mode and Setting Mode........................................................................ 16
2.4 Parameter Setting from Display Panel............................................................. 20
2.4.1 Setting Example of Select Type Parameter (Flow rate unit)................ 20
2.4.2 Setting Example of Numeric Type Parameter (Flow rate span).......... 21
2.4.3 Setting Example of Alphanumeric Type Parameter (Tag No.)............. 22
2.5 microSD Card Insertion/Removal..................................................................... 23
3. Operation with HART Configuration Tool................................................ 24
3.1 Connecting HART Configuration Tool.............................................................. 24
3.2 HART Configuration Tool and Device Revision.............................................. 25
3.2.1 Device Description (DD) and Device Revision.................................... 25
3.2.2 Device Type Manager (DTM) and Device Revision............................ 26
3.3 Basic Setup.......................................................................................................... 27
3.4 Parameter Configuration................................................................................... 28
3.5 Data Renewing and Upload/Download Function............................................ 28
3.6 Specific Functions of HART Configuration Tool............................................. 31
3.6.1 Process Variable Setting (Dynamic Variables).................................... 31
3.6.2 Burst Mode........................................................................................... 32
3.6.3 Event Notification................................................................................. 35
3.6.4 Multidrop Mode.................................................................................... 36
4. Functions.................................................................................................... 38
4.1 Basic Settings..................................................................................................... 40
4.1.1 Overview.............................................................................................. 40
4.1.2 PV Mapping of Process Value............................................................. 41
4.1.3 Display of the Process Value............................................................... 41
4.1.4 Unit Setting........................................................................................... 43
4th Edition: Mar. 2023 IM 01E21A02-02EN

All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2020, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
2
4.1.5 Span Setting........................................................................................ 44
4.1.6 Damping Time Constant Setting.......................................................... 45
4.1.7 Low-cut Function Setting..................................................................... 46
4.1.8 Meter Factor Setting............................................................................ 49
4.1.9 Sensor Type Setting............................................................................. 50
4.1.10 Sensor’s Nominal Size Setting............................................................ 51
4.1.11 Density Setting..................................................................................... 51
4.1.12 Temperature Setting............................................................................ 52
4.1.13 Span Flow Velocity Display.................................................................. 52
4.1.14 User Span Function............................................................................. 53
4.1.15 Zero Adjustment................................................................................... 55
4.2 Totalization Function.......................................................................................... 57
4.2.1 Totalized Value and Unit Setting.......................................................... 57
4.2.2 Totalized Value Display and Totalization Function............................... 57
4.2.3 Totalization Switch Function................................................................ 59
4.2.4 Totalizer Operation at Alarm Occurrence............................................. 60
4.2.5 Start/Stop Setting for Totalization Function......................................... 61
4.2.6 Totalization Direction Setting............................................................... 61
4.2.7 Totalized Value Reset/Preset Function................................................ 62
4.3 Pulse Output, Frequency Output, and Status Output..................................... 63
4.3.1 Pulse/Status Output Mode Setting...................................................... 63
4.3.2 Pulse Output/Frequency Output Mapping........................................... 64
4.3.3 Alarm Output Function......................................................................... 64
4.3.4 Pulse Width Setting.............................................................................. 65
4.3.5 Active Direction Setting........................................................................ 66
4.3.6 Active Pulse Setting............................................................................. 67
4.3.7 Pulse Rate Setting............................................................................... 67
4.3.8 Frequency Output Range Setting........................................................ 69
4.3.9 Status Output Function Setting............................................................ 70
4.3.10 Pulse Option Setting............................................................................ 73
4.4 Status Input......................................................................................................... 74
4.4.1 Active Direction Setting for Status Input.............................................. 74
4.4.2 Status Input Function Setting............................................................... 75
4.5 Analog Input and Analog Output...................................................................... 76
4.5.1 Analog Output Select........................................................................... 76
4.5.2 Display Analog Output......................................................................... 76
4.5.3 Analog Output High/Low Limit Function.............................................. 77
4.5.4 Absolute Range Function.................................................................... 78
4.5.5 Alarm Output Function......................................................................... 79
4.5.6 Analog Output Priority.......................................................................... 79
4.5.7 Current Value Adjustment.................................................................... 80
4.5.8 Analog Input Function Setting.............................................................. 81
IM 01E21A02-02EN
3
4.5.9 Display Analog Input............................................................................ 81
4.5.10 Analog Input Unit Setting..................................................................... 81
4.5.11 Analog Input Range Setting................................................................. 82
4.5.12 Analog Input High/Low Limit Function................................................. 82
4.6 Multi Range Function......................................................................................... 83
4.6.1 Multi Range type.................................................................................. 83
4.6.2 Multi Range Setting.............................................................................. 83
4.6.3 Multi Range Operation......................................................................... 84
4.6.4 Forward/Reverse Range..................................................................... 86
4.6.5 Combination of Multi Range and Forward/Reverse Range................ 88
4.6.6 External Contact Range....................................................................... 89
4.6.7 External Contact Range (with Answer)................................................ 90
4.6.8 Combination of External Contact Range and Forward/Reverse
Range................................................................................................... 91
4.7 Auxiliary Calculation Function.......................................................................... 92
4.7.1 Fluid Flow Direction Setting................................................................. 92
4.7.2 Rate Limit Function Setting.................................................................. 92
4.7.3 Pulsing Flow Support Function Setting................................................ 95
4.7.4 Power Frequency Synchronization Setting......................................... 95
4.7.5 Density Correction Calculation............................................................ 96
4.7.6 Calorie Calculation............................................................................... 98
4.7.7 Limit of Alarm Output Function............................................................ 99
4.8 Alarm.................................................................................................................. 100
4.8.1 Errors and Countermeasures............................................................ 100
4.8.2 Operation at the Time of Error........................................................... 106
4.8.3 Alarm Display Setting..........................................................................110
4.8.4 Alarm History Function.......................................................................111
4.8.5 Alarm Mask Function..........................................................................112
4.8.6 Burnout Direction Display...................................................................119
4.9 Display................................................................................................................ 120
4.9.1 Language Setting............................................................................... 120
4.9.2 Display Item Setting........................................................................... 121
4.9.3 Decimal-point Position Setting........................................................... 122
4.9.4 Display Line Count and Scroll Settings.............................................. 124
4.9.5 Trend Graph Setting.......................................................................... 125
4.9.6 Update Period Setting........................................................................ 127
4.9.7 Other Settings.................................................................................... 128
4.9.8 microSD Card Setting........................................................................ 131
4.10 Device Information............................................................................................ 133
4.10.1 Order Information............................................................................... 133
4.10.2 Device Revision................................................................................. 134
4.10.3 Memo Function.................................................................................. 135
IM 01E21A02-02EN
4
4.10.4 Date and Time Information................................................................ 135
4.10.5 Display Operation Time..................................................................... 136
4.10.6 Explosion Protection Setting.............................................................. 136
4.11 Self-diagnostic Function.................................................................................. 137
4.11.1 Types of Diagnosis Functions............................................................ 137
4.11.2 Alarm High/Low Limit Function.......................................................... 137
4.11.3 Electrode Adhesion Detection........................................................... 139
4.11.4 Sensor Empty Check......................................................................... 140
4.11.5 Wiring Connection Diagnosis............................................................ 141
4.11.6 Verification (Device Health Diagnosis) Function............................... 142
4.11.7 Electrode Insulation Deterioration Diagnosis.................................... 146
4.11.8 Flow Noise Diagnosis........................................................................ 147
4.11.9 Low Conductivity Diagnosis............................................................... 148
4.11.10 Coil Insulation Diagnosis................................................................... 149
4.11.11 Other Setting...................................................................................... 149
4.12 Test Mode........................................................................................................... 150
4.12.1 Test Mode Setting.............................................................................. 150
4.12.2 Test Value Setting.............................................................................. 151
4.12.3 Test 2 Mode........................................................................................ 152
4.12.4 Test Mode Auto Reset........................................................................ 152
4.13 Event Management Function........................................................................... 153
4.13.1 Backup Function................................................................................ 153
4.13.2 Restore/Duplicate Parameter............................................................ 156
4.13.3 Backup and Restore Parameters...................................................... 160
4.13.4 Data Logging Function....................................................................... 164
4.14 Parameter Protection....................................................................................... 167
4.14.1 Software Write Protection Function................................................... 167
4.14.2 Display Restriction Function.............................................................. 168
5. Parameter Lists........................................................................................ 169
5.1 Display Parameters.......................................................................................... 171
5.2 Easy Configuration Parameters...................................................................... 172
5.3 Basic Configuration Parameters..................................................................... 174
5.4 Totalization Configuration Parameters.......................................................... 177
5.5 Pulse Output Configuration Parameters........................................................ 181
5.6 Status Input and Output Configuration Parameters..................................... 184
5.7 Analog Output/Input Configuration Parameters........................................... 186
5.8 Auxiliary Function Configuration Parameters............................................... 188
5.9 Alarm Configuration Parameters.................................................................... 190
5.10 Display Configuration Parameters................................................................. 195
5.11 Device Information Configuration Parameters............................................. 198
5.12 Diagnosis Function Configuration Parameters............................................ 201
5.13 Test Mode Configuration Parameters............................................................. 204
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5
5.14 Backup/Restore/Data Logging Configuration Parameters.......................... 206
5.15 Parameter Protection Parameters.................................................................. 208
6. Parameter Menu Tree............................................................................... 209
6.1 Display Menu Tree............................................................................................ 209
6.2 HART Communication Menu Tree.................................................................. 226
Revision Information.......................................................................................... 242
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<1. Introduction> 6
1. Introduction
This manual explains basic operations of ADMAG TI Series AXG, AXW Magnetic Flowmeter with
HART Communication Protocol.
For items which are not covered in this manual, read the applicable user’s manuals listed in
“Table 1.1 Manual and General Specifications List” in the ADMAG TI Series Installation Manual.
These documents can be downloaded from the YOKOGAWA website. To ensure the correct use
of the product, read these manuals thoroughly and fully understand how to operate the product
before operating it. To confirm the model name and specifications of the product, refer to the
general specifications.
Website address: https://www.yokogawa.com/library/
Precautions Related to the Protection, Safety, and Alteration of the

Product
The following safety symbol marks are used in this manual and the product.
WARNING
A WARNING sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition, or the
like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or death of personnel.
CAUTION
A CAUTION sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition, or the
like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of
part or all of the product.
IMPORTANT
An IMPORTANT sign denotes that attention is required to avoid damage to the product or system
failure.
NOTE
A NOTE sign denotes information necessary for an essential understanding of operation and
features.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<1. Introduction> 7
The following symbols are used in the product and the manual to indicate the accompanying
safety precautions:
Protective grounding terminal
Functional grounding terminal

(This terminal should not be used as a protective grounding terminal.)
Alternating current
Direct current
Caution
This symbol indicates that the operator must refer to an explanation in the user’s manual in order to avoid
the risk of injury or death of personnel or damage to the product.
For the protection and safe use of the product and the system in which this product is
incorporated, be sure to follow the instructions and precautions on safety that are stated in user’s
manual whenever you handle the product. Take special note that if you handle the product in a
manner that violates these instructions, the protection function of the product may be damaged or
impaired. In such a case, YOKOGAWA does not guarantee the quality, performance, function, or
safety of the product.
Regarding This User’s Manual

• This manual should be provided to the end user.
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without YOKOGAWA’s written
permission.
• YOKOGAWA makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual, including, but not
limited to, implied warranty of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
• If any questions arise or errors are found, or if any information is missing from this manual,
inform the nearest YOKOGAWA sales office.
• The specifications covered by this manual are limited to those for the standard type under
the specified model number break-down and do not cover custom-made products.
• Note that changes in the specifications, construction, or component parts of the product
may not immediately be reflected in this manual at the time of change, provided that
postponement of revisions will not cause difficulty to the user from a functional or
performance standpoint.
• This manual is intended for the following personnel:
Engineers responsible for the installation and wiring of the product.
Personnel responsible for the normal daily operation of the product (operator).
• To ensure correct use, read this manual and the applicable manuals thoroughly before
starting operation. Read the general specifications for specifications of the product.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<1. Introduction> 8
Trademarks
• All the brands or names of Yokogawa Electric’s products used in this manual are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
• All other company and product names mentioned in this manual are trade names,
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
• In this manual, trademarks and registered trademarks are not marked with “™” or “®”.
• HART is a registered trademark of FieldComm Group.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<1. Introduction> 9
1.1 For Safe Use of Product

For the protection and safe use of the product and the system in which this product is
incorporated, be sure to follow the instructions and precautions on safety that are stated in user’s
manual whenever you handle the product. Take special note that if you handle the product in a
manner that violates these instructions, the protection function of the product may be damaged
or impaired. In such a case, YOKOGAWA shall not be liable for any indirect or consequential loss
incurred by either using or not being able to use the product.
General
WARNING
• Do not open the cover in wet weather or humid environments. When the cover is open, the
stated enclosure protection is not applicable.
• When opening the cover, wait for more than 20 minutes after turning off the power. Only an
expert engineer or skilled personnel is permitted to open the cover.
Operation
WARNING
Be sure to enable the write protect function to prevent parameters from being overwritten after
finishing parameter setting.
In rare cases, the IR switches may respond unexpectedly to water drops or extraneous
substances sticking on the surface of the display panel due to characteristics of the operating
principles. The possibility of malfunction arises after rain or cleaning near the place where the
flowmeter is installed. Repeatedly turning a flashlight, etc. on and off in the direction of the IR
switch may also be the cause of malfunction.
Refer to the installation manual for the hardware write protect function, and Section 4.14 for the
software write protect function.
Maintenance
WARNING
• If dirt, dust, or other substances adheres to the glass of the display, wipe them clean with a
soft dry cloth.
• Maintenance of this product should be implemented in a maintenance service shop where
necessity tools and environment condition are provided. The required environmental
condition is that the ambient temperature should be 5 to 40°C (the maximum relative humidity
is 80 % for temperature 5 to 31°C, and decreasing linearly to 50 % relative humidity at 40°C).
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<1. Introduction> 10
microSD card
IMPORTANT
• Do not store or use the microSD card in places with static electricity, near electrically charged
objects, or where electrical noise is present. Doing so can result in shock or damage to the
microSD card.
• Do not disassemble or modify the microSD card.
• Do not physically shock, bend, or pinch the microSD card.
• During reading/writing of data, do not turn off the power, apply vibration or shock, or pull out
the card. Data can be corrupted or permanently lost.
• Use only the microSD cards designated by YOKOGAWA. The operation of the device cannot
be guaranteed when other cards are used.
• When inserting the microSD card into the product, make sure to orient the microSD card
correctly (face up or down) and insert it securely. If not inserted correctly, the microSD card
will not be recognized by the product.
• Do not touch the microSD card with wet hands.
• Do not use the microSD card if it is dusty or dirty.
• The microSD card comes formatted. If you would like to format the microSD card, use the
product’s Format function.
• YOKOGAWA provides no warranty for damage to, or loss of data recorded on the microSD
card, regardless of the cause of such damage or loss. We recommend regularly making
backup copies of your data.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<1. Introduction> 11
1.2 Warranty
• The warranty shall cover the period described in the quotation presented to the purchaser at
the time of purchase. Problems that may occur during the warranty period shall be repaired
free of charge.
• In case of problems, the customer should contact the YOKOGAWA representative from
which the product was purchased or the nearest YOKOGAWA office.
• If a problem arises with this product, please inform YOKOGAWA of the nature of the
problem and the circumstances under which the problem developed, including the model
specification and serial number. Any diagrams, data and other information you can include
in your communication will also be helpful.
• Responsible part for repair costs of the problems shall be determined by YOKOGAWA
based on our investigation.
• The purchaser shall bear the responsibility for repair costs, even during the warranty period,
if the malfunction is due to:
- Improper and/or inadequate maintenance by the purchaser.
- Failure or damage due to improper handling, use, or storage which does not conform to
design conditions.
- Use of the product in question in a location not conforming to the standards specified by
YOKOGAWA, or problems due to improper maintenance of the installation location.
- Failure or damage due to modification or repair by any party except YOKOGAWA or an
approved representative of YOKOGAWA.
- Malfunction or damage from improper relocation of the product in question after delivery.
- Reason of force majeure such as fires, earthquakes, storms/floods, thunder/lightning,
or other natural disasters, as well as disturbances, riots, warfare, or radioactive
contamination.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<2. Basic Operating Procedures> 12
2. Operation by Display unit
2.1 Basic Operating Procedures

The parameter settings can be changed by using three IR (infra-red) switches; [SET], [SHIFT]
and [▼] switches on the display. The three IR switches enable the user to set parameters from
the outside of the glass of the display cover.
This section provides descriptions of basic parameter configuration on the display and operation
procedures of the IR switches. This product can be also operated by using the dedicated
handheld terminal or the FieldMate (Versatile Device Management Wizard). For details about the
setting procedure, refer to Chapter 4.
WARNING
Be sure to enable the write protect function to prevent parameters from being overwritten after
finishing parameter setting.
In rare cases, the IR switches may respond unexpectedly to water drops or extraneous
substances sticking on the surface of the display panel due to characteristics of the operating
principles. The possibility of malfunction arises after rain or cleaning near the place where the
flowmeter is installed. Turning on and off the flashlight, etc. towards the IR switch may also be
the cause of the malfunction.
Refer to the Installation Manual for the hardware write protect function, and Section 4.14 for the
software write protect function.
IMPORTANT
Operate the display under conditions where direct sunlight, etc. do not shine to the IR switches
directly when the parameter setting operation is carried out.
NOTE
• Always keep the display cover closed and operate the setting switches from the outside of
the glass window.
• If dirt, dust, or other substances adheres to the glass of the display, wipe them clean with a
soft dry cloth.
• Operation with dirty gloves may cause a switch response error.
NOTE
The language on the display is set to “English” as default at factory shipment. Select the
adequate language referring to Subsection 4.9.1.
The menu pass of the display on this manual is set to “English”.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
2.2 Display and Basic Configuration

The display of the integral flowmeter and remote transmitter has the various functions below.
2.2.1 Display Configuration

microSD card
(Optional code: /MC)
00 : 00 Status icon and time (Current time / Operation days)

0.00000m/s VEL
Data display
0.0% FLP
(Abbreviation: see Table 2.2.1)
22.000mA A01
SET SFT INC Switch On/Off status
(On: inverted)
IR switches
F0201.ai
(1) Basic operation of IR switches

The basic operations of the display panel are done by the three IR switches; [SET], [SHIFT], and
[▼]. Combining two IR switches provides a different function, and the function of the switch is
displayed on the display.
Function of switch
IR switch (Note 1) Function
(Note 2)
▪Apply parameter and data (Note 3)
[SET ► ] SET
▪Move to next menu
▪ Set/reset Multiple selectable options
(Select type parameter)
[SHIFT] SFT
▪ Move cursor right
(Numeric type parameter)
▪ Move cursor down
▪ Increment value
[▼] INC
▪ Change position of decimal point
▪ Move cursor up
[SHIFT] + [ ▼ ] (= [ ▲ ]) DEC
▪ Decrement value
[SHIFT] + [SET ► ] ▪ Cancel
ESC
(= [ESC ◄ ]) ▪ Back to previous menu
Note 1: [A] + [B] (=[C]): The function is changed to switch [C] when switch [B] is pressed while pressing switch [A].
Note 2: [SET], [SFT], [INC], [DEC] and [ESC] indicate the assigned function in accordance with display mode at that time. All
functions cannot be used simultaneously.
Note 3: “Apply” and “Enter” are executed by pressing [SET] twice. If the execution does not work properly, release your finger
from the display glass completely after initially pressing [SET], and then, press that key again.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
(2) Status icons
Icon Description Icon Description
Write protection function Write protection function
Disable Enable
Device Busy Device Fault
microSD card microSD card
Ready Accessing
microSD card Parameter
Disable to access Uploading
Parameter Trend graph function
Downloading Running
System Alarm
HART communication
Occurs
Process Alarm Setting Alarm
Occurs Occurs
Warning Information
Occurs Occurs
Display Damping Operation level:
Valid Operator
Operation level: Operation level:
Maintenance Specialist
(3) Data indication part

Up to eight process values can be selected on the display. It is possible to display up to four items
on the display at the same time, and the remaining four items can be displayed if scrolled.
Table 2.2.1 Abbreviation table of process values to be indicated on the display
Abbreviation Description
FLP *1 Flow rate %
PRV *1 Process value
VEL *1 Flow velocity
VFL *1 Volumetric flow rate
MFL *1 Mass flow rate
FLB Flow rate in % bar graph
CAL *1 Calorie (Only available for AXG, not for AXW)
TL1 *1 Totalized value 1
TAG Tag No.
LTG Long tag
COM Communication protocol
ADH Adhesion diagnostic level (Alarm at Level 4)
AO1 *1 Analog output value 1
AO2 *1 Analog output value 2
Flow level of flow noise diagnosis (Alarm at Level 4)
FNL
(Only available for AXG, not for AXW)
TC1 *2 Total 1 count
*1: A trend graph can be displayed online.
*2: Available for Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) R2.02.01 or later and Ind soft rev (Indicator board
revision/Ind soft rev) R2.02.01 or later.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
NOTE
The PRV (PV value) and FLP (flow rate%) operate in the same way as Analog output 1.
If the low cut function is enable for Analog output 1 (AO1 low cut / Low cut), the PRV and FLP
are affected by the low cut function. Their value after low cut are displayed.
On the other hand, the VEL (flow velocity), VFL (volume flow), MFL (mass flow), and CAL
(calorific value) are not affected by the low cut function. Their values are displayed as they are.
NOTE
If Main soft rev (Main board revision / Main soft rev) is R2.01.01 or earlier, the PRV (PV value),
FLP (flow rate%), VEL (flow velocity), VFL (volume flow), MFL (mass flow), and CAL (calorific
value) are not affected by the low cut function for analog output. Their values are displayed as
they are.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
2.2.2 Operation Level

When setting a parameter from the display, configurable parameters differ depending on the
three operation levels shown in Table 2.2.2. For maintenance and specialist levels, the pass code
needs to be entered.
Table 2.2.2 Parameter Setting from Display and Operation Level
Operation Level
Parameter Description
Reading Writing
Possible to set a display language
Operator All parameters on the display and parameters No pass code required
related to display items.
Possible to set parameters allowed
to set with the operator level Pass code required
Maintenance All parameters
and parameters related to zero Default value: 0000
adjustment.
Possible to set all writable Pass code required
Specialist All parameters
parameters Default value: 0000
A pass code can be configured only from the display.

This setting can be configured with the following parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Access cfg ► (see below)
Change of pass code (maintenance code) with maintenance operation level
authority.
Chg mainte
To change the level, maintenance or specialist operation level authority is
necessary.
Change of pass code (special code) with specialist operation level authority.
Chg special
To change the level, specialist operation level authority is necessary.
2.3 Display Mode and Setting Mode

The device runs in Display Mode when the power is on. To check or change parameters, Setting
Mode must be activated. The following procedure explains how to change to Setting Mode from
Setting Mode. For the functions of the IR switches, refer to Subsection 2.2.1.
[Procedure]
1) Keep touching [SET] switch for few seconds.
00 : 00
0.00000l/min
PRV
0.00000m/s VEL
FLB
SET SFT INC
F0513.ai
2) Touch [SFT] + [INC] switches.

00 : 00
Touch SFT + INC
SET SFT INC

F0514.ai
IM 01E21A02-02EN
3) “No“ is selected.
Touch [INC] switch and select “Yes”.
00 : 00
Setting Mode
▲ No
▼ Yes
SET SFT INC
F0515.ai
4) Touch [SET] switch.

00 : 00
Setting Mode
▲ Yes
▼ No
SET SFT INC
F0516.ai
5) “Yes” is blinking.
Touch [SET] switch again.
00 : 00
Setting Mode
Yes
SET SFT INC

F0517.ai
6) The screen moves to the menu of Operation Level.

00 : 00
Operation level
▲Specialist
Exit
▼Operator
SET SFT INC
F0518.ai
7) Select an appropreate operation level by moving the cursor with [INC] or [DEC] switch.
Passcode is not necessary for “Operator”. For “Maintenance” and “Specialist”, passcode
is necessary for each. For passcode setting, [SFT] is for position change, and [INC] is for
number, then twice [SET] is for entry completion.
The default passcode at the factory shipment is set to “0000”.
00 : 00
Pass code
****
0000
0000 9999
SET SFT INC
F0519.ai
8) When the Operation Level is determined, the screen moves to “Device setup” as the Setting
Mode where parameters can be configured.
9) After completing parameter setting, push [ESC] switch. The screen returns to the Display
Mode.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
NOTE
Follow the procedure bellow when Ind soft rev (Indicator board revision / Ind soft rev) is
R2.01.02 or earlier.
[Procedure]
1) Turn on the power and wait for several seconds to start Display Mode.
00 : 00
0.00000l/min
PRV
0.00000m/s VEL
FLB
SET SFT INC
F0212.ai
2) Press and hold the [SET] switch for two seconds. The screen will switch to the
“Operation level” menu.
00 : 00
Operation level
▲Maintenance
Specialist
▼Exit
SET SFT INC
F0213.ai
3) Select an appropriate operation level by moving the cursor with the [INC] or [DEC] switch.
The “Operator” does not require a pass code, but for “Maintenance” and “Specialist”, the
pass code is necessary.
When setting the pass code, [SFT] is for position change, [INC] is for number change, and
pressing [SET] twice is for entry completion.
The default pass code is set to “0000” when shipped from the factory.
00 : 00
Pass code
****
0000
0000 9999
SET SFT INC
F0214.ai
4) When the operation level is determined, the screen moves to “Device setup” and switches
to Setting Mode. In Setting Mode, parameters can be configured.
5) After completing the parameter settings, press the [ESC] switch. The screen will return to
Display Mode.
IMPORTANT
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Easy setup wizard
When parameters on the menu described above are set in the Wizard of Easy setup, be sure to
execute “Setting download” in each menu after setting the parameters. If “Setting download” is
not executed, any changed parameters will not be correctly applied to the device.
NOTE
If there is no operation for 10 minutes in Setting Mode, the screen goes back to Display Mode.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Parameter form
The following three parameter forms are available.
Type Example of display Description
00 : 00
Unit
m3 Selects the adequate type of data from among the pre-
Select type ▲l(liter) determined alternatives.
▼cm3
SET SFT INC
00 : 00
Span
+7200.00 Specifies the data with a combination of number and a decimal
Numeric type +2200.00 point for each digit.
+0.00001 +999999
SET SFT INC
00 : 00
Tag No
Alphanumeric FT-1234 The data is configured with the combination of alphanumeric
type FT-1234 characters. (Tag No., Special unit, etc.)
SET SFT INC
T0500_03.ai
The alphanumeric type displays the following alphanumeric characters in order.

0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@
[\]^_`{|}~"space"
IM 01E21A02-02EN
2.4 Parameter Setting from Display Panel

This section explains how to specify the parameters from the display panel. Refer to Section 2.3,
and set the operation level to “Specialist”. Also select a parameter to be specified in the Setting
Mode.
NOTE
The flow rate unit, span flow, and tag No. are explained as an example.
If a particular parameters is specified at the time of ordering, this product is shipped with the
parameter specified. If a parameter is not specified at the time of ordering, that parameter needs
to be set by the customer.
2.4.1 Setting Example of Select Type Parameter (Flow rate

unit)
The following is the procedure of changing the flow rate unit for the Select type parameter.
The physical unit and time unit need to be specified individually for the flow rate unit. When
setting the volumetric flow rate unit to l/min, set “l (liter)” to the physical unit and “/min” to the time
unit.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► Volume ► (see below)
Unit Specifies the physical unit of the volumetric flow rate.
Time unit Specifies the time unit of the volumetric flow rate.
00 : 00 Specify the physical unit for volumetric flow rate.

Volume
▲Damp pls/ttl Move the cursor with [INC] and [DEC] according to the menu path described above,
Unit press [SET] to determine, and select the “Unit”.
▼Time unit
SET SFT INC
F0215.ai
00 : 00 Move the cursor with [INC] and [DEC], press [SET] to determine, and select the
Unit
m3 “l(liter)”. While the selected unit is blinking, press [SET] to determine the unit. The
▲l(liter) screen returns to the setting page after completing the setting.
▼cm3
SET SFT INC
F0216.ai
00 : 00 Specify the time unit for volumetric flow rate.

Volume
▲Unit Move the cursor with [INC] and [DEC] according to the menu path above, press [SET]
Time unit to determine, and select the “Time unit”.
▼Span
SET SFT INC
F0217.ai
00 : 00 Move the cursor with [INC] and [DEC], select “/min”, and then press [SET]. While the
Time unit
▲
/s selected unit is blinking, press [SET] to determine the unit. The screen returns to the
/min setting page after completing the setting.
▼ /h
SET SFT INC
F0218.ai
00 : 00 After completing the parameter setting, you can return the screen to Display Mode by
0.00000l/min
PRV
pressing [ESC].
0.00000m/s VEL
FLB
SET SFT INC
F0219.ai
IM 01E21A02-02EN
NOTE
Be sure to set the flow rate unit first when changing the flow rate unit and flow span value at the
same time.
When the flow rate unit is changed, the span flow rate is converted in conjunction with the
changed unit.
2.4.2 Setting Example of Numeric Type Parameter (Flow rate

span)
The following is the procedure of changing the flow rate span as numeric type parameter.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► Volume ► Span
NOTE
Be sure to set the flow rate unit first when changing the flow rate unit and flow span value at the
same time.
When the flow rate unit is changed, the span flow rate is converted in conjunction with the
changed unit.
00 : 00 Specify the flow rate span unit.

Volume
▲Time unit /h Move the cursor with [INC] and [DEC] according to the menu path above, press [SET]
Span +7200.00 to determine, and select the “Span”.
▼Setting download
SET SFT INC
F0220.ai
00 : 00 The switch's functionality for setting the span flow rate is as below:
Span
+7200.00 Plus/minus and numeric change: [INC]
+2200.00 Movement of digits: [SFT]
+0.00001 +999999 Determination of parameter: [SET]
SET SFT INC
F0221.ai : Minimum value
: Maximum value
Press [SET] to determine the parameter while the setting value of the flow rate span is
blinking. The screen returns to the setting page after completing the setting.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
2.4.3 Setting Example of Alphanumeric Type Parameter (Tag

No.)
The following is the procedure of changing the Tag No. of alphanumeric type parameter.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ► Order info ► Tag No
00 : 00 Specify the Tag No..

Order info
▲Disp install Move the cursor with [INC] and [DEC] according to the menu path above, press [SET]
Tag No to determine, and select the “Tag No”.
▼Long tag
SET SFT INC
F0222.ai
00 : 00 The Tag No. can be set with up to eight characters from the display.
Tag No
FT-1234 The switch's functionality for setting the Tag No. is as follows:
FT-1234 Number and character change: [INC]
SET SFT INC Movement of digits: [SFT]
F0223.ai Determination of parameter: [SET]
Available characters: ASCII characters
Press [SET] to determine the parameter while the value of Tag No. is blinking. The
screen returns to the setting page after completing the setting.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
2.5 microSD Card Insertion/Removal

If the optional code MC is selected, the parameter setting can be stored into the dedicated
microSD card inserted into the display unit. The stored data can be restored to the device. For
detailed on the functions, refer to Chapter 4.
WARNING
Use only a microSD card designated by YOKOGAWA. The operation of the device cannot be
guaranteed when other cards are used.
(1) Insertion of microSD Card

Carefully insert the dedicated microSD card into the slot on the display until the slot holds the
card. (see Figure 2.5).
microSD card
00 : 00
0.00000m/s VEL
0.0% FLP
22.000mA AO1
SET SFT INC
F0224.ai
Figure 2.5 Insertion of microSD Card
(2) Removal of microSD Card

Remove the microSD from the slot shown in Figure 2.5.
When removing the microSD card, select “Execute” from the following parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► microSD ► Unmount
IMPORTANT
If the microSD card is removed without executing “Unmount” on the software, it may cause the
stored data to be erased or the product to operate abnormally.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<3. Operation with HART Configuration Tool> 24
3. Operation with HART Configuration

Tool
This chapter describes the connection of this product and HART configuration tool (FieldMate
(Versatile Device Management Wizard)), and the operations using the HART configuration tool.
Refer to the User’s Manual of FieldMate (IM 01R01A01-01E) for details about FieldMate.
NOTE
• For more details regarding the operations of the HART configuration tool, refer to the manual
of the HART configuration tool.
• When using FieldMate as the HART configuration tool, be sure that the revision is R3.02.00
or later.
NOTE
Parameters on the HART configuration tool are displayed in English only. Even if a language
other than English is selected as “display language” on the display panel, parameters are
displayed in English on the HART configuration tool.
3.1 Connecting HART Configuration Tool

The HART configuration tool can interface with this product from the control room, the device
site, or any other wiring termination point in the loop, provided there is a minimum load resistance
of 230 Ω between the connection and the receiving instrument.
To communicate with the HART configuration tool, the HART configuration tool must be
connected in parallel with this product. The connections must be non-polarized.
See Figure 3.1 for a connection example.
4 to 20 mA DC Control Room
Relaying Signal Terminal
Terminals Transmission Line Board Distributor
Iout+
Iout-
Magnetic Flowmeter
Terminal Box Load
USB Resistance
FieldMate 230 to 600 Ω
Modem
USB
PC/FieldMate
F0301.ai
Figure 3.1 Connecting the HART Configuration Tool
IMPORTANT
The communication signal is superimposed on an analog output signal during communication.
It is recommended to set a low-pass filter (approximately 0.1s) to the receiver in order to reduce
the output effect from the communication signal. Before online-communication, confirm that the
communication signal does not affect the upper system.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
3.2 HART Configuration Tool and Device

Revision
IMPORTANT
The protocol revision supported by the HART configuration tool must be the same as or later
than the protocol revision of the product. If it is not, communication error will occur.
3.2.1 Device Description (DD) and Device Revision

Before using the HART configuration tool, confirm that the DD of this product is installed in the
configuration tool. If the correct DD is not installed to the configuration tool, download the correct
DD from the HART official site and install it, or contact the respective vendor of the configuration
tool for its upgrade information.
The device revision is as follows.
DD Revision 1 or later
AXG4A (0x371A)
Device Type
AXW4A (0x371B)
Device Revision 3
• Confirmation of DD revision
(1) Turn on the power of this product with the configuration tool separated.
(2) Confirm the device revision from the installed DD file name according to the procedure
provided for the configuration tool.
The DD file name is four digits: the first two digits indicate the device revision and the latter two
digits indicate the DD revision.
NOTE
The device revision of the DD file is given in hexadecimal.
• Confirmation of Device revision

Connect the setting tool to this product and confirm the revision with the following parameter.
Menu path
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Device information ► HART setup ► Fld dev rev
IM 01E21A02-02EN
3.2.2 Device Type Manager (DTM) and Device Revision

When using FieldMate as the HART configuration tool, use the following DTM.
AXG4A FDT2.0 HART7 DTM
DTM Name
AXW4A FDT2.0 HART7 DTM
DTM Revision 5.9.2.0 or later *
AXG4A (0x371A)
Device Type
AXW4A (0x371B)
Device Revision 1, 3
*: The DTM is included in Yokogawa DTM Library HART 8.2 or later.
NOTE
The DTM revision can be confirmed with “DTM setup”.

Device Files is a medium included in FieldMate.
The user registration site provides Device Files with the latest update programs.
(URL: https://partner.yokogawa.com/global/fieldmate/)
When updating DTM, the following operations with “DTM setup” are required.
• Update DTM catalog
• Register DTM to the supported device.
For details, refer to the User’s Manual of FieldMate.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
3.3 Basic Setup

If the dedicated parameters are specified at the time of ordering, this product is shipped with the
Tag No. or device information configured.
The Tag No. and device information can be checked and set with the following parameters.
Tag No. (Tag, Long tag)

Menu path
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Device information ► Order information ► (see below)
Tag Up to 8 alphanumeric characters *1
Long tag Up to 32 alphanumeric characters *2
Device information (Descriptor, Message, Date)

Menu path
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Device information ► HART setup ► (see below)
Descriptor Up to 16 alphanumeric characters *1
Message Up to 32 alphanumeric characters *1
Display format: mm/dd/yyyy
Date
mm = month (2 digits), dd = days (2 digits), yyyy = year (4 digits)
*1: Symbols, letters and numbers enclosed by the thick line in the following table are available.
*2: All symbols, letters and numbers in the following table are available.
SP ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~
* “SP” indicates a space.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
3.4 Parameter Configuration

The parameter structure of the HART configuration tool is hierarchical and various settings are
available. For details of the menu tree and parameter, refer to Chapters 4 and 5.
Note that some display parameters are different from those of the HART configuration tools.
CAUTION
Note that a parameter cannot be set with the display while communicating with the HART
configuration tool.
3.5 Data Renewing and Upload/Download

Function
(1) Data Renewing
The data is automatically updated at 0.5 to 2-second cycles.
(2) Upload/Download Function

The upload function is used for copying the parameters of the product to the HART configuration
tool. The download function is used for setting the copied parameters in the HART configuration
tool into another product. The applicable parameters are included in “Upload variables” as
follows.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Menu path
HART Upload variables ► (see below)
Tag Total1 options Display select7

Long tag Total1 Start/Stop Display select8
Descriptor Total1 preset value Trend select 1
Message Total1 set point Trend select 2
Date Total1 count unit Trend select 3
Final asmbly num Total2 unit Trend select 4
Distributor Total2 conv factor Display format PV
Model Total2 low cut Display format total 1
Dev id Total2 fail opts Display format total 2
Poll addr Total2 options Display format total 3
PV is Total2 Start/Stop Display contrast
SV is Total2 preset value Display line
TV is Total2 set point Display period
QV is Total2 count unit Display NE107
Alarm record mask 1 Total3 unit Display alarm
Alarm record mask 2 Total3 conv factor Display scroll
Alarm record mask 3 Total3 low cut Display damping
Alarm out mask 1 Total3 fail opts Display format date
Alarm out mask 2 Total3 options Display inversion
Alarm out mask 3 Total3 Start/Stop Language
Alarm out mask 4 Total3 preset value Display measure mode
Low alarm*1 Total3 set point Display installation
Low low alarm*1 Total3 count unit IRSW operation
High alarm*1 Totalizer reset mode Display time
High high alarm*1 Pulse1 output mode VF target select
Hi/Lo alarm hysteresis Pulse1 active mode Diagnostic output
PV flow select Pulse1 fix width VF mode
Velocity check Pulse1 rate unit VF No
Velocity unit Pulse1 rate value Electrode size
Velocity span Pulse1 low cut Explosion protection
Velocity damping AO/frequency Pulse1 alarm out Basic model code
Velocity damping pulse/total Frequency1 at 0% Suffix config 1
Time unit Frequency1 at 100% Suffix config 2
Volume flow unit Status output1 function Option 1
Volume flow span Pulse1 option Option 2
Volume flow damping AO/frequency Loop current mode Option 3
Volume flow damping pulse/total AO1 low cut*1 Option 4
Mass flow unit AO1 high limit Remote sensor basic model code
Mass flow span AO1 low limit Remote sensor suffix config 1
Mass flow damping AO/frequency AO1 alarm out Remote sensor suffix config 2
Mass flow damping pulse/total AO1 range mode Remote sensor option 1
Density unit Forward span 2*1 Remote sensor option 2
Density fixed value Reverse span 1*1 Remote sensor option 3
Nominal size unit Auto range hyst Remote sensor option 4
Process applied to the primary variable is outside the
Nominal size Bi direction hyst
operating limits of the field device
Process applied to the non-primary variable is outside the
User span select AO1 Flow direction
operating limits of the field device
User unit AO1 Display select1 PV Analog Channel Saturated
User span AO1 Display select2 PV Analog Channel Fixed
Total1 unit Display select3 Field device has more status available
A reset or self test of the field device has occurred, or
Total1 conv factor Display select4
power has been removed and reapplied
A modification has been made to the configuration of the
Total1 low cut*1 Display select5
field device
Field device has malfunctioned due to a hardware error
Total1 fail opts Display select6
or failure
*1: This parameter is not displayed with FDT2.0 DTM. It is displayed only with HART built-in DTM.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Menu path
HART Upload variables ► (see below)
10:Main board CPU failure Critical Power Failure 72:Data logging not started
11:Reverse calculation failure Failure 80:Analog output 1 saturated
12:Main board EEPROM failure Out of Specification 81:Analog output 2 saturated
13:Main board EEPROM default Function Check 82:Pulse output 1 saturated
14:Sensor board failure Simulation Active 83:Pulse output 2 saturated
15:Sensor communication error Non-Volatile memory failure 84:Analog input saturated
16:A/D1 failure[Signal] Volatile memory error 85:Cable misconnect
17:A/D2 failure[Exciter] Watchdog reset executed 86:Coil insulation warning
18:Coil open Voltage conditions out of range 131:Transmitter type mismatch
19:Coil short Environmental conditions out of range 87:Adhesion over level 3
20:Exciter failure Electronic failure 88:Low conductivity warning
21:PWM1 stop Device Configuration Locked 89:Insulation detection
22:PWM2 stop Status Simulation Active 90:Flow noise over level 3
23:Option board mismatch Discrete Variable Simulation active 91:Flow noise over level 4
24:Option board EEPROM failure Event Notification Overflow 92:Autozero warning
25:Option board A/D failure Secondary Analog Channel Saturated 93:Verification warning
26:Option board SPI failure Tertiary Analog Channel Saturated 94:Factory noise warning
27:Parameter restore incomplete Quaternary Analog Channel Saturated 95:Simulation active
28:Indicator board failure Quinary Analog Channel Saturated 96:Analog output 1 fixed
29:Indicator board EEPROM failure Subdevice list changed 97:Analog output 2 fixed
30:LCD driver failure Duplicate master detected 98:Pulse output 1 fixed
31:Indicator board mismatch Subdevice mismatch 99:Pulse output 2 fixed
32:Indicator communication error Subdevice with duplicate IDs found 100:Analog input fixed
33:microSD card failure Stale data notice 101:Parameter restore running
50:Signal overflow Capacity Denied 102:Display over warning
51:Empty pipe detection Bandwidth allocation pending 103:microSD card size warning
52:H/L or HH/LL alarm Block transfer pending 104:Parameter backup incomplete
53:Adhesion over level 4 Radio failure 105:microSD card mismatch
60:Span configuration error Secondary Analog Channel Fixed 106:microSD card removal procedure error
61:PV flow select configuration error Tertiary Analog Channel Fixed 120:Watchdog
62:Analog output 1 4-20mA limit error Quaternary Analog Channel Fixed 121:Power off
63:Analog output 2 4-20mA limit error Quinary Analog Channel Fixed 122:Instant power failure
64:Analog output 1 multi range error 67:Pulse output 1 configuration error 123:Parameter backup running
65:H/L HH/LL configuration error 68:Pulse output 2 configuration error 124:Data logging running
66:Density configuration error 69:Nominal size configuration error 130:Device ID not entered
Maintenance required 70:Adhesion configuration error
Device variable alert 71:Flow noise configuration error
IM 01E21A02-02EN
3.6 Specific Functions of HART Configuration

Tool
3.6.1 Process Variable Setting (Dynamic Variables)
The process variable to be assigned to PV (Primary Variable), SV (Secondary Variable), TV
(Tertiary Variable) and QV (Quaternary Variable) can be selected.
Dynamic Variable Selection Default Value
PV Velocity, Volume flow, Mass flow, Flow noise* Volume flow
SV "Velocity, Volume flow, Mass flow, Totalizer 1
TV Flow noise*, Calorific value*, Totalizer 2
QV Totalizer 1, Totalizer 2, Totalizer 3" Totalizer 3
*: Only available for AXG, not for AXW
This setting can be configured with the following method.
Menu path
HART Process variables root menu ► Dynamic variables ► Change PV...QV map
IM 01E21A02-02EN
3.6.2 Burst Mode

(1) Applicable parameter of burst mode
When the burst mode is enabled, the product continuously sends up to three data via HART
communication. Also, it is possible to continuously send an alarm signal when a change to the
product settings or a change by the self diagnosis is detected.
NOTE
When changing the setting of the burst mode, set the Burst mode to “Off”.
Burst Message Burst Trigger

Command Parameter Burst Command Burst Trigger Units
Trigger Mode Source
Continuous --- ---
Window
PV Cmd1: PV Rising Depends on the
PV assigned variable to
Falling PV
On-change
Continuous --- ---
Window
Loop Current and Cmd2: % range/
Rising
Percent Range current % range %
Falling
On-change
Continuous --- ---
Window
Cmd3: Dyn vars/ Depends on the
PV, SV, TV, QV Rising
current PV assigned variable to
Falling PV
On-change
Continuous --- ---
Window Process variable Depends on the
Device Variable with Cmd9: Device
Rising assigned to the assigned variable
status vars w/ status
Falling top of Burst Device to Burst Device
On-change Variables Variables
Continuous --- ---
Window Process variable Depends on the
Cmd33: Device
Device Variable Rising assigned to the assigned variable
variables
Falling top of Burst Device to Burst Device
On-change Variables Variables
Cmd48: Read Continuous --- ---
Additional Device
Additional Device
Status On-change All status ---
Status
IM 01E21A02-02EN
(2) Burst mode setting
Burst Mode can be specified in Easy Burst Mode or Detailed Burst Mode.
• Setting Easy Burst Mode

Easy Burst Mode can send one Burst Command continuously. Easy Burst Mode (BM0: Burst
Message 0) can be configured with the following parameters.
Menu path
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Device information ► HART setup ► Burst setup ►
HART
Easy burst setup ► set Easy Burst
NOTE
When Easy Burst Mode is used, Event Notification cannot be used.
• Setting Detailed Burst Mode

Detailed Burst Mode can send up to three Burst Commands continuously under various
conditions. Detailed Burst Mode can be configured with the following parameters.
Menu path
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Device information ► HART setup ►
HART
Burst setup ► Detailed burst setup ► (see below)
BM1 Setting ►
Detailed Burst Mode Settings (BM1: Burst Message 1)
set Detailed Burst
BM2 Setting ►
set Detailed Burst
BM3 Setting ►
set Detailed Burst
In accordance with the method, specify the following.

• Burst Command
• Update Period/Max Update Period
• Burst Message Trigger Mode
(3) Burst Command Setting

Select the transmission data from the Burst Command.
Burst Command Command Parameter
Cmd1:PV PV
Cmd2:% range/current Loop Current and Percent Range
Cmd3:Dyn vars/current PV, SV, TV, QV
Cmd9: Device vars w/ status Device Variable with status
Cmd33:Device Variables Device Variable
Cmd48:Read Additional Device Status Additional Device Status
IM 01E21A02-02EN
(4) Burst Device Variables Setting
When “Cmd9: When Device vars w/ status” or “Cmd33:Device Variables” is selected as Burst
Command, it is required to specify the Burst Device Variables, for which up to eight values for
AXG, six values for AXW can be specified.
Dev Var Code Burst Device Variables Dev Var Code Burst Device Variables
0 Velocity 4 Totalizer 2
1 Volume flow 5 Totalizer 3
2 Mass flow 6* Flow noise
3 Totalizer1 7* Calorific value
* Only available for AXG, not for AXW
(5) Update Period/Max Update Period Setting

Specify the Update Period/Max Update Period, which is the update period of Burst Message
Trigger Mode. The Burst Trigger Source is checked with the period of the Update Period, and if
it fulfills the conditions of Burst Message Trigger Mode, the data will be updated. When it does
not fulfill the conditions of the Trigger Mode with the period of the Update Period and reaches the
Max Update Period, the data will be updated forcibly.
The Update Period/Max Update Period needs to be selected from the following.
Update Period/Max Update Period
0.5 s 8s
1s 16 s
2s 32 s
4s 60 s to 3600 s (any value)
NOTE
For the Update Period, specify a value smaller than the Max Update Period.
(6) Burst Message Trigger Mode Setting

Specify Burst Message Trigger Mode. When “Window”, “Rising”, or “Falling” is set, the Burst
Trigger Level must be specified.
Burst Message Trigger Mode Description
Continuous Burst Messages are transmitted continuously.
Burst Trigger Level is the amount of change. The device variable value detects and
Window
transmits the amount of change.
The setting value of the Burst Trigger Level is the high limit value. When the
Rising device variable value exceeds the high limit value, it is detected, and a message is
transmitted.
The setting value of the Burst Trigger Level is the low limit value. The device
Falling
variable value detects and transmits that the low limit value is surpassed.
When the device variable value is changed from the previous output, it is detected,
On-change
and a message is transmitted.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
3.6.3 Event Notification

Changes to the device settings and changes in the device status by self diagnosis can be
detected as events, sending continuous alarm signals. Up to five events can be stored as the
history. When Event Notification is used, the Detailed Burst Message must be specified and the
Burst Message must be enabled.
NOTE
Note that events stored as the history are deleted if the power is turned off.
(1) Event Notification Setting

The Event Notification can be configured with the following parameters.
Menu path
HART
Event setup ► (see below)
set Event Specifies Event Notification.
stop Event Specifies stopping Event Notification.
Select an Event Notification configuration from the table below.

Selection Description
Specifies device status to detect an event (Event Mask)
Event Mask
(Cmd48: Read Additional Device Status)
Event Notification Retry Time Specifies the period of Event Notification when an event occurs.
Max Update Time Specifies the period of Event Notification when an event has not occurred.
Event Debounce Interval Specifies the minimum time that an event continues.
(2) Event Acknowledgment

If an Event is occurring, it must be acknowledged.
Acknowledgment of an event can be configured with the following parameter.
Menu path
HART
Event setup ► acknowledge Event
NOTE
Only the event which occurs first can be acknowledged. When multiple events occur, they must
all be acknowledged.
(3) Event Notification Flow

When Event Notification is enabled, a status change caused by the self diagnosis of the
product will activate the alarm Event1. Event1 is continuously transmitted in the cycle of Event
Notification Retry Time.
If Event2 occurs before Event1 is acknowledged, the information on Event2 is stored internally
and continuously transmitted until Event1 is acknowledged. When Event1 is acknowledged,
Event1 disappears and Event2 is continuously transmitted until it is acknowledged. When Event2
is acknowledged, all Events are acknowledged, and are continuously transmitted at the interval
of the Max Update Time.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
3.6.4 Multidrop Mode

When Multidrop is enabled, the product can refer to the connection of HART communication
devices on one communication transmission line. This product can connect up to 63 devices.
To activate Multidrop Mode, a number from 1 to 63 must be assigned to the polling address.
When Multidrop Mode is activated, analog output signal settings of 4 to 20 mA must be changed
because all the data is transmitted digitally.
Multidrop Mode can be configured with the following procedures.
(1) Polling Address Setting

Assign a number from 1 to 63 to the polling address. The polling address can be configured with
the following parameter.
Menu path
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Device information ► HART setup ► Poll addr
NOTE
When the same polling address is set for two or more devices in the Multidrop Mode,
communication with these devices is disabled.
(2) Analog Output Setting

Usually, the analog output of Multidrop Mode should be fixed at 4 mA on the product side.
However, it becomes impossible to use a burnout output if the analog output is fixed at 4 mA.
In the case of applications which receive and operate the analog output signal, only one variable
analog output signal can be set per loop.
The analog output of Multidrop Mode can be configured with the following parameter.
Menu path
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Device information ► HART setup ► Loop current mode
Select the analog output of multi-drop mode from the table below.
Disabled Specifies analog output to 4mA (fixed).
Enabled Specifies analog output to 4 to 20 mA (variable).
NOTE
The analog output signal which is fixed in Multidrop Mode is applied only to analog output 1.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
(3) Enabling Multidrop Mode
Refer to the User's Manual of the HART configuration tool when configuring the settings of polling
for the receiving instrument.
(4) Communication in Multidrop Mode

• When connection between the device and the HART configuration tool starts, the tool
searches for the device set to Multidrop Mode, and the polling address and tag are
displayed.
• After the desired device is selected, normal communication with the selected device
becomes possible. However, communication in Multidrop Mode is slower.
(5) Release of Multidrop Mode

To reset the Multidrop Mode, the parameter needs to be configured as below.
• Specify the polling address of (1) to “0”.
• Specify the analog output of (2) to “Enabled”.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 38
4. Functions
This chapter describes the functions of the product. Following is an overview of each function.
Basic settings
This product can measure the process values of the flow velocity, volumetric flow rate, mass flow
rate, calorie, and flow noise at the same time. A damping time constant can be specified for each
process value.
For details about how to check measured results and the setting procedure, refer to Section 4.1.
Totalization function
This product has three totalizers for totalizing selected process values. In addition to the totalized
value display function, the product has a totalization counter function to scale totalized values
with the conversion factor and to count a specific flow rate. The product also has a totalization
switch function that compares a specified target value with a totalized value to output the result in
the form of the status output, and a totalization preset function that totalization starts from a value
set in advance.
For details about the totalization function and setting procedures, refer to Section 4.2.
Pulse output, Frequency output, and Status output

A measurement result can be output as pulse output, frequency output, or status output. When a
pulse output is used, the pulse width or pulse rate can be selected. When a frequency output is
used, outputs at 0% and 100% for the span of the process value can be specified. When a status
output is used, the product status can be output as a status output. For both pulse output and
frequency output, the low-cut values can be set.
For details about each output and the setting procedure, refer to Section 4.3.
Status input
Since this product has a status input terminal, the totalizer preset function and zero adjustment
function, etc. can be used in response to the status input from the outside. For details about the
setting procedure of these functions, refer to Section 4.4.
Analog output/Analog input

Up to two analog outputs (one analog output for AXW) are available. The high/low limit function,
forward/reverse flow rate function (reverse flow rate: 4 to 12 mA, forward flow rate: 12 to 20 mA),
alarm output function, low-cut function and other functions are available.
Analog input (only available for AXG) is useful for inputting fluid temperature via an external
temperature transmitter.
For details about setting procedures for the analog output and analog input, refer to Section 4.5.
Multi range function

The multi range function makes it possible to measure a flow rate while switching multiple
ranges. A range can be switched in response to a flow rate, flow direction, and status input.
For details about the multi range function, refer to Section 4.6.
Auxiliary calculation function

This function is used to calculate the temperature correction for density or calorie by inputting the
temperature from an external device in the form of an analog input. The accuracy of mass flow
rate measurement is improved by setting the temperature correction for density.
For details about the auxiliary calculation function, refer to Section 4.7.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 39
Alarm
A detected error can be notified as an alarm or warning. This function can show the error status
based in accordance with NAMUR NE107 to suit parameter settings. It is also possible to record
alarms that occurred in the past in the history and mask unnecessary so that they are hidden on
the display.
For details about contents and setting procedures, refer to Section 4.8.
Display
This display supports multiple languages for use on the display. This function can also show the
time changes of the selected parameter in a trend graph on the display.
For details about display settings, refer to Section 4.9.
NOTE
The language on the display is set to “English” as default at factory shipment. If necessary, refer
to Subsection 4.9.1 to select the adequate language.
The menu pass of the display on this manual is set to “English”.
Device information
With this function, the parameters specified at the time of order, model code, and suffix code of
this product can be checked on the display.
For details about how to check the device information, refer to Section 4.10.
Self-diagnostic function
The self-diagnostic function can be used to diagnose failures of the product or the process state.
For example, this function is useful for diagnosing the health of the product by using the electrode
adhesion detecting function, sensor empty check function, or verification function.
For details about the various self-diagnostic functions, refer to Section 4.11.
Test mode
With this mode, the process value and the value output from a connection terminal can be
arbitrarily specified to test a response from the device.
For details about the test mode, refer to Section 4.12.
Backup, Restore, and Duplicate of Parameter

The backup function can store settings of the parameters into the built-in memory in the display.
If the optional code MC is selected, setting parameters are stored in the microSD card supplied
with this product in addition to the built-in memory in the display (display board).
The backup data can be used to restore settings of the product for which data is backed up or
duplicate settings to another product.
For details about the backup, restore, and duplicate functions, refer to Section 4.13.
Software write protection function

A write protect can be changed using the hardware write protection switch and the parameter
settings (software write protection).
For details about the hardware write protection switch, refer to the Installation Manual. For details
about the software write protection function, refer to Section 4.14.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 40
4.1 Basic Settings

4.1.1 Overview
This product can measure flow velocity, volumetric flow rate, mass flow rate, calorie, and flow
noise at the same time. A measured result can be output as an analog output, frequency output,
pulse output, and status output.
Refer to the table below for codes and connection terminals of communication/input-output and
input and output for each terminal.
Communication Connection Terminal
and I/O Code I/O 1 I/O 2 I/O 3 I/O 4
JA E ― ―
P/Sout2 Iout2
JB*
Passive Active
Sin Iout2
JC*
(No-voltage) Active
Sout P/Sout2
JD*
Passive Passive
Sin P/Sout2
JE J
(No-voltage) Passive
Iout1 P/Sout1 P/Sout2
Sin
JF* Active Passive Active
(No-voltage)
(with internal resistor)
P/Sout2
Sin
JG L Active
(No-voltage)
(without internal resistor)
Iout2 Iin
JH*
Passive Active
P/Sout2 Iin
JJ*
Passive Active
Sin Iin
JK*
(No-voltage) Active
JP* ―
P/Sout1
Passive P/Sout2
JQ*
Passive
Iout2
JR* Passive ―
Iout1 P/Sout1
Passive Passive P/Sout2
JS* (NAMUR) Passive
(NAMUR)
P/Sout1
JT* ― ―
Passive
Iout1: Analog output 1 (HART communication signal superimposed)
Iout2: Analog output 2
Iin: Analog input
P/Sout1: Pulse/Status output 1
P/Sout2: Pulse/Status output 2
Sout: Status output
Sin: Status input
The position of Communication and I/O code:
Integral type:
AXG □□□ - □□□□□□□□□□□□□□ - □■■□□
AXW □□□ - □□□□□□□□□□□□□□ - □■■□□
AXW □□□G - ■□□□□□ - □□□□ - □□□
Remote Transmitter:
AXG4A- □□□□□□□■■□□
AXG4A- □□□□□□□■■□□
NOTE
Available functions vary depending on communication and I/O code specified at the time of order.
Before using each function of this product, be sure to check the connection terminal function of
the product with the table above.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 41
4.1.2 PV Mapping of Process Value

The flow velocity, volumetric flow rate, mass flow rate, and flow noise can be mapped to the
primary variable (PV).
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► PV flow select
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Process variables ► PV flow select
Selection
Description
Display HART
Velocity Velocity Specifies the flow velocity to the Primary Value.
Specifies the volumetric flow rate to the Primary
Volume Volume
Value.
Mass Mass Specifies the mass flow rate to the Primary Value.
Specifies the flow noise to the Primary Value.
Diag Diag
Setting example: If the volumetric flow rate is set to PV, and the volumetric flow rate span is set to
100 m3/h for use, set the parameters as follows.
PV flow select=“Volume”
Volume flow unit=“m3”
Time unit=“/h”
Volume flow span=“100.000”
Setting example: If the mass flow rate is set to PV, with the mass flow rate span being set to
10,000 kg/h and the density to 1000 kg/m3 for use, set the parameters as follows.
Density unit=“kg/m3”
Density fixed value=“1000.000”
PV flow select=“Mass”
Mass flow unit=“kg”
Time unit=“/h”
Mass flow span=“10000.0”
4.1.3 Display of the Process Value

The flow velocity, volumetric flow rate, mass flow rate, totalized value, calorie, and flow noise can
be checked with the following parameters.
Flow rate (PV)

Menu path
Display Device setup ► Process variables ►(see below)
HART Process variables root menu ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Dynamic variables ► PV% Displays the percentage to the range for the process
-
rnge value set to the Primary Value.
Device variables ► Disp For Flow rate(%) / Disp flowrate%, it displays the
Flow rate(%) value synchronized with analog output 1.
flowrate%*
- Dynamic variables ► PV Displays the process value set to the Primary Value.
Device variables ► Disp For Flow rate / Disp flowrate, it displays the value
Flow rate synchronized with analog output 1.
flowrate*
*: Available for Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) R2.02.01 or later
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 42
Example: When the high limit (AO1 high limit) is set to 20.3 mA;
When analog output 1 is fixed to the high limit, Flow rate / Disp flowrate displays the fixed value
because it is synchronized with analog output 1.
PV displays the actual measured value because it is not synchronized with the analog output 1.
When the analog output is fixed due to an alarm, these values behave in the same way as above.
Flow rate
[m3/h] Current [mA]
PV
22.8 20.3
Flow rate
Disp flowrate
0 4.0
Time
F0449.ai
NOTE
If Main soft rev (Main board revision / Main soft rev) is R2.01.01 or earlier, Flow rate(%) and Flow
rate on the display shows the actual value even if analog output is fixed.
For details about how to check the device revision (Main soft rev and Ind soft rev), refer to
Subsection 4.10.2.
Flow velocity, Volumetric flow rate, Mass flow rate, Totalized value,
Calorie
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Process variables ►( see below)
HART Process variables root menu ► Device variables ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Velocity Velocity Displays the flow velocity.
Volume Volume flow Displays the volumetric flow rate.
Mass Mass flow Displays the mass flow rate.
Totalizer ►Totalizer 1 Totalizer1 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 1.
Displays the calorie.
Calorie Calorific value
Flow noise
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ► Flow noise ► Result ► Value
HART Process variables root menu ► Device variables ► Flow noise
This parameter is only available for AXG, not for AXW.

This parameter displays the flow noise.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 43
4.1.4 Unit Setting

Units can be specified for the flow velocity, volumetric flow rate, mass flow rate, and calorie. Each
flow rate unit can be specified with the physical unit and the time unit, individually. However, note
that the time unit is common to all flow rates. Also, the unit of the flow noise is fixed to “cm/s” and
it cannot be changed.
Example) To set the volumetric flow rate unit to “m3/h”

The volumetric unit can be set to “m3/h” and the time unit to “/h”. At this time, the time unit for the
mass flow rate and calorie are also set to “/h”.
Physical unit
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Process variables ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Velocity ► Unit Velocity ► Velocity unit Specifies the physical unit of the flow velocity.
Volume flow ► Volume flow Specifies the physical unit of the volumetric flow
Volume ► Unit
unit rate.
Mass ► Unit Mass flow ► Mass flow unit Specifies the physical unit of the mass flow rate.
Specifies the physical unit of the calorie.
Calorie ► Unit Calorie ► Calorific unit
Time unit
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Volume ► Time unit Volume flow ► Time unit Specifies the time unit of the volumetric flow rate.
Mass ► Time unit Mass flow ► Time unit Specifies the time unit of the mass flow rate.
Specifies the time unit of the calorie.
Calorie ► Time unit Calorie ► Time unit
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 44
4.1.5 Span Setting

A span can be specified for the flow velocity, volumetric flow rate, mass flow rate, calorie, and
flow noise.
However, the unit for the span is the same as the unit specified in Subsection 4.1.4. If the unit is
changed, the span value is converted to match the changed unit.
Flow velocity, Volumetric flow rate, Mass flow rate, Calorie

Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Velocity ► Span Velocity ► Velocity span Specifies the span of the flow velocity.
Volume flow ► Volume flow
Volume ► Span Specifies the span of volumetric flow rate.
span
Mass flow ► Mass flow
Mass ► Span Specifies the span of the mass flow rate.
span
Calorie ► Calorific flow Specify the span of the calorie.
Calorie ► Span
span (Only available for AXG, not for AXW)
Flow noise
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ► Flow noise ► Span
HART Diagnostic root menu ► Diagnosis ► Flow noise ► Flow noise span

This parameter specifies the span of the flow noise.
NOTE
Be sure to note the following points when specifying the flow rate span.
• For a line with a significant flow change, set the maximum flow rate to the flow rate span. If
the flow rate exceeds the flow rate span, the error of the flow rate% increases.
• For a line with a stable flow rate, set the flow rate span to approximately 1.5 to 2.0 times the
normal flow rate.
• For flow rate span, set the value for which the flow velocity is comparable to the range from
0.3 to 10 m/s. The converted value to the flow velocity unit can be checked using the sizing
data described in the general specifications or the parameter (Subsection 4.1.13). For the
parameter in Subsection 4.1.13, it displays the value obtained by converting the specified
flow rate span to the flow velocity unit.
NOTE
Be sure to set the flow rate unit first when the span value and its flow rate unit are changed at the
same time.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 45
NOTE
If Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) is R2.02.02 or later, when the above span
parameters are changed, a value equivalent to 3% of the changed span is automatically set to
the Total/Pulse low cut parameters.
To set an arbitrary lowcut value, set the Total/Pulse low cut parameter after the above settings.
If the Total/Pulse low cut parameter value is 0, the low cut parameter is not automatically set.
Example:
When changing the span from 50.0 m3/h to 100.0 m3/h, if Main board revision/Main soft rev
is R2.02.01 or earlier, the Total/Pulse low cut value will remain the same as before the span
change. In R2.02.02 or later, a value of 3.0 m3/h, which is equivalent to 3% of the changed span
of 100.0 m3/h, is automatically set as the Total/Pulse low cut.
Pulse1 low cut/Total1 low cut Behavior
Volume flow span Parameter
Change (Main board revision/Main soft (Main board revision/Main soft
(When PV Flow Select is Volume) rev) rev)
R2.02.01 or earlier R2.02.02 or later
Before Change 50.0 m3/h 1.5 m3/h 1.5 m3/h
After Change 100.0 m3/h 1.5 m /h
3
3.0 m3/h
4.1.6 Damping Time Constant Setting

The damping time constant (63.2% response) can be specified for the flow velocity, volumetric
flow rate, mass flow rate, calorie, and flow noise. To reduce an output fluctuation or change the
response speed, change the damping time constant (default value is 3.0 seconds).
It is possible to measure a pulsing flow of up to 1 Hz with an output damping of 0.1 seconds for a
piston pump, etc.
The damping time constant can be set for the output of each process value. The damping time
constant is a common setting for the analog output, frequency output, pulse output, and totalized
value. However, the damping setting for the flow noise is common to all outputs.
Analog output/Frequency output

Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Velocity ► Velocity Specifies the damping time constant of the flow
Velocity ► Damp AO/F
damping AO/frequency velocity.
Volume flow ► Volume flow Specifies the damping time constant of the
Volume ► Damp AO/F
damping AO/frequency volumetric flow rate.
Mass flow ► Mass flow Specifies the damping time constant of the mass
Mass ► Damp AO/F
damping AO/frequency flow rate.
Calorie ► Calorific value Specifies the damping time constant of the calorie.
Calorie ► Damp AO/F
damping AO/frequency (Only available for AXG, not for AXW)
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 46
Pulse output/Totalizer
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Velocity ► Velocity Specifies the damping time constant of the flow
Velocity ► Damp pls/ttl
damping pulse/total velocity.
Volume flow ► Volume flow Specifies the damping time constant of the
Volume ► Damp pls/ttl
damping pulse/total volumetric flow rate.
Mass flow ► Mass flow Specifies the damping time constant of the mass
Mass ► Damp pls/ttl
damping pulse/total flow rate.
Calorie ► Calorific value Specifies the damping time constant of the calorie.
Calorie ► Damp pls/ttl
damping pulse/total (Only available for AXG, not for AXW)
Flow noise
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ► Flow noise ► Damp
HART Diagnostic root menu ► Diagnosis ► Flow noise ► Flow noise damping

This parameter specifies the damping time constant of the flow noise.
4.1.7 Low-cut Function Setting

A low-cut value can be specified for the analog output, frequency output, pulse output, and
totalizer output value.
If the low-cut function is used, the flow rate below set values can be stopped from being output.
This function helps reduce erroneous output when the flow is “0”.
However, the unit of the low-cut value is the same as the unit specified in Subsection 4.1.4. If the
unit is changed, the low-cut value is changed to match the changed unit. The low-cut value is
not synchronized with the span value. If the span value is changed, be sure to reset the low-cut
value.
Set the low-cut value to “0” if the low-cut function is not used.
Analog output
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ►(see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Analog output/input ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the low-cut value of analog output 1.
Analog output 1 ► AO1 If PV is set for the measurement screen on the
AO1 ► Low cut
low cut display, a PV value which is low-cut with the value
set here is displayed.
Analog output 2 ► AO2 Specifies the low-cut value of analog output 2.
AO2 ► Low cut
low cut (Only available for AXG, not for AXW)
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 47
Frequency output/Pulse output
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status out ► ( see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Pulse/Status output 1 ► Specifies the low-cut values of frequency output 1
PO1/SO1 ► Low cut
Pulse1 low cut and pulse output 1.
Pulse/Status output 2 ► Specifies the low-cut values of frequency output 2
PO2/SO2 ► Low cut
Pulse2 low cut and pulse output 2.
Totalizer
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Totalizer ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Totalizer ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Totalizer 1 ► Low cut Totalizer1 ► Total1 low cut Specifies the low-cut value of totalizer 1.
The actual value for which the low-cut is effective has ±0.5% of the hysteresis from the set
low-cut value. The hysteresis width on the negative side (going into the low-cut. When flow rate
is decreasing) and the positive side (going out of low-cut. When flow rate is increasing) are as
follows:
(1) Negative side
= Low-cut set value – (Minimum span set with multi range × 0.5 %)
(2) Positive side
= Low-cut set value + (Minimum span set with multi range × 0.5 %)
Example: When setting to span of volumetric flow rate = 10.0 m3/h,
Low-cut value = 1.0 m3/h
(1) Negative side
= 1.0 [m3/h] – (10.0 [m3/h] × 0.5 [%])
= 0.95 [m3/h]
(2) Positive side
= 1.0 [m3/h] + (10.0 [m3/h] × 0.5 [%])
= 1.05 [m3/h]
In this case, when the flow rate is decreasing, the output flow rate value becomes 0.0 [m3/h] with
the low-cut function if the actual flow rate goes below 0.95 [m3/h]. On the other hand, when the
flow rate is increasing, the flow rate value is output if the actual flow rate goes over 1.05 [m3/h].
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 48
Output [m3/h]
(1)
Hysteresis (2)
1%
0
0.95 1 1.05 Input [m3/h] F0401.ai
NOTE
Note that the totalization might be counted due to the influence of the output fluctuation near 0%
output if a small low-cut value is set.
In particular, if the value of the flow rate span, damping time constant, or conductivity is low, the
totalization is easily counted when the flow rate is “0”. In such a case, increase the flow rate span,
damping time constant, or low-cut value.
NOTE
When changing the output process value to be output, it is necessary to specify the low-cut value
again.
NOTE
If Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) is R2.02.02 or later, and if the Forward/
Reverse flow rate function is switched between enabled and disabled by changing the Pulse/
Status output mode and Status output function, or if changing the span parameter settings, a
value equivalent to 3% of the span is automatically set to the Total/Pulse low cut parameters.
When setting arbitrary values for the low cut parameters, set the Total/Pulse low cut parameters
after setting these parameters.
Example:
When changing the span from 50.0 m3/h to 100.0 m3/h, if Main board revision/Main soft rev
is R2.02.01 or earlier, the Total/Pulse low cut value will remain the same as before the span
change. In R2.02.02 or later, a value of 3.0 m3/h, which is equivalent to 3% of the changed span
of 100.0 m3/h, is automatically set as the Total/Pulse low cut.
Pulse1 low cut/Total1 low cut Behavior
Volume flow span Parameter
Change (Main board revision/Main soft (Main board revision/Main soft
(When PV Flow Select is Volume) rev) rev)
R2.02.01 or earlier R2.02.02 or later
Before Change 50.0 m3/h 1.5 m3/h 1.5 m3/h
After Change 100.0 m3/h 1.5 m /h
3
3.0 m3/h
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 49
4.1.8 Meter Factor Setting

When ordering only the remote transmitter, or when changing the remote sensor to combine with,
the meter factor of the remote sensor must be specified.
When the customer orders the remote transmitter and the remote sensor at the same time
as a combination, the meter factor of the remote sensor to combine with is set to the remote
transmitter. So, the customer is not required to set the meter factor.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Sensor ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Basic setup ► Sensor ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Low MF Low MF Specifies the meter factor of the low-frequency side.
Specifies the meter factor of the high-frequency
High MF High MF
side.
NOTE
The meter factor is described in the METER FACTOR column on the remote sensor nameplate.
Example:
F0445.ai
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 50
4.1.9 Sensor Type Setting

When only the remote transmitter is ordered, or when the remote sensor to combine with, the
type of the remote sensor must be specified.
When the customer orders the remote transmitter and the remote sensor at the same time as a
combination, the type of the remote sensor to combine with is set to the remote transmitter at the
factory before shipment. So, the customer is not required to set the sensor type.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Sensor ► Flow sensor sel
HART Device root menu ► Basic setup ► Sensor ► Flow sensor select
From the table below, select the sensor type.

Selection
Description
Display HART
Configure to use the ADMAG AXG Series remote
ADMAG AXG ADMAG AXG
sensor. (Only available for AXG, not for AXW)
Configure to use the ADMAG AXW Series remote
ADMAG AXW ADMAG AXW
sensor.
Configure to use the ADMAG AXF Series remote
ADMAG AXF ADMAG AXF
Configure to use the ADMAG AE Series remote
ADMAG AE ADMAG AE
Calibrator Calibrator Configure to use the AM012 (calibrator) .
Other 1 Other1
Other 2 Other2 Configure to use another remote sensor.
Other 3 Other3
IMPORTANT
When changing the combination of the sensors, the meter factor needs to be re-adjusted based
on actual flow calibration to secure the accuracy. When using another remote sensor, such as
other companies' products, contact a Yokogawa sales office or representative.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 51
4.1.10 Sensor’s Nominal Size Setting

When only the remote transmitter is ordered, or when changing the remote sensor to combine,
the nominal size of the remote sensor must be specified.
When the customer orders the remote transmitter and the remote sensor at the same time
as a combination, the nominal size of the remote sensor to combine with is set to the remote
transmitter at the factory before shipment. So, the customer is not required to set the nominal
size.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Sensor ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Sensor ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Nominal size unit Nominal size unit Specifies the unit of the nominal size.
Nominal size Nominal size Specifies nominal size.
NOTE
For the integral type, the nominal size and its unit have been set at the factory shipment. Do not
change the these parameters.
4.1.11 Density Setting

The density must be set in order to measure the mass flow rate. The density can be selected
from the density compensated with fixed density or density corrected by temperature.
For details about how to measure the mass flow rate or correct the density by temperature, refer
to Subsection 4.7.5.
If density is set to “0” while the mass flow rate is mapped to PV, a setting error will result.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► Density ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Process variables ► Density ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Selects one of the following temperature-based
density corrections.
Value select Density value select • Fixed value: Uses the fixed density
• Correction value: Uses the corrected density
Unit Density unit Specifies the unit of the density.
Fixed density Density fixed value Specifies the value of the fixed density.
Specifies the reference density value of the
standard condition to use the density compensated
Std density Standard density
with temperature.
Displays the corrected density.
Correct density Correct density
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 52
4.1.12 Temperature Setting

These parameters are only available for AXG, not for AXW.
The temperature setting is required when calculating the calorie based on this value’s difference
from the temperature that is input via the analog input process.
For details about the calorie calculation, refer to Subsection 4.7.6.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► Temperature ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Process variables ► Temperature ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the reference standard temperature for the
Std temperature Standard temperature
temperature-based density correction function.
Displays the temperature that is input from analog
Meas temperature Measured temperature
input.
Specifies the reference temperature for the calorie
Fixed temperature Calorific fix temp calculation with the temperature difference from the
temperature which is input from analog input.
4.1.13 Span Flow Velocity Display

The span of the PV-mapped process value in Subsection 4.1.2 can be displayed in the flow
velocity unit.
This information can be viewed with the following parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► Velocity check
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Process variables ► Velocity check
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 53
4.1.14 User Span Function

The user span function can display a process value assigned to analog output 1 and analog
output 2 with the customer’s desired special unit. If the same process value is assigned to both
analog outputs, the setting for analog output 1 takes precedence.
Using user span

Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► User Span ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Basic setup ► User span ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
User span AO1 ► Specifies the user span function to the process
User span select AO1
Select value allocated to analog output 1.
Specifies the user span function to the process
User span AO2 ►
User span select AO2 value allocated to analog output 2.
Select
From the table below, select the user span function.

Selection
Description
Display HART
No No Not using user span function.
Yes Yes Using user span function.
User unit setting

Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the desired unit of up to 8 characters to
User span AO1 ► Unit User unit AO1
the process value assigned to analog output 1.
Specifies the desired unit of up to 8 characters to
User span AO2 ► Unit User unit AO2 the process value assigned to analog output 2.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 54
User span setting
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the desired span to the process value
User span AO1 ► Span User span AO1
assigned to analog output 1.
Specifies the desired span to the process value
User span AO2 ► Span User span AO2 assigned to analog output 2.
IMPORTANT
The output in the user unit is displayed as follows:
Output in user unit = (Output in a physical unit of the process value / Span in a physical unit of the
process value) × User span
Example:
To set the span setting for analog output 1 to 100 dl/s, set the parameters as follows due to 100 dl
= 10 L. Displays 100 dl/s when outputting 100 %.
PV = “Volume flow”
Span of volumetric flow rate = “10 l/s”
Using user span for analog output 1 = “Yes”
User unit for analog output 1 = “dl/s”
User span for analog output 1 = “100”
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 55
4.1.15 Zero Adjustment

The zero adjustment is carried out to set the output for zero flow velocity to 0% (4 mA). Although
the adjustment to zero is performed at the manufacturing factory prior to shipment, this procedure
must be carried out once again following the installation of piping to match the product to its
operating conditions.
This subsection describes the zero adjustment procedure using the display.
IMPORTANT
• The zero adjustment should be carried out before the actual operation. Note that setting
and updating other parameters cannot be carried out during the zero adjustment (for
approximately 30 seconds).
• The zero adjustment should be executed only after the sensor is filled with measuring fluid
and the fluid velocity is reduced to zero by closing the valve.
• Each time the measuring fluid is changed, be sure to perform the zero adjustment for that
changed fluid.
Execution of zero adjustment

Zero adjustment using the display can be executed with the following parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Autozero ► Execute ► Execute
Device setup
00 : 00
Select “Diag/Service” in accordance with the menu path above.
▲Process variables ►
Diag/Service ►
▼Easy setup wizard ►
SET SFT INC
F0402.ai
Diag/Service
00 : 00
Select “Autozero”.
▲Verification ►
Autozero ►
▼AO/AI trim ►
SET SFT INC
F0403.ai
Autozero
00 : 00
Select “Execute”.
▲ Execute
▼ Result ►
SET SFT INC
F0404.ai
Execute
00 : 00
Select “Execute”.
Not execute
▲Execute
▼Not execute
SET SFT INC
F0405.ai
Execute
00 : 00
When “Execute” blinks, touch [SET] to execute.
Execute
SET SFT INC

F0406.ai
Autozero function
00 : 00
The zero adjustment starts, and the progress is displayed with the remaining time and a
executing... bar graph. Wait for the zero adjustment to complete.
00 : 08 The time remaining
SET SFT INC
until the end.
F0407.ai
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 56
Autozero
00 : 00
After the zero adjustment is finished, the display returns to “Autozero” menu.
▲ Execute
▼ Result ►
SET SFT INC
F0408.ai
Zero adjustment by HART communication can be executed with the following parameters.
Menu path
HART Device root menu ► Basic setup ► Autozero ► Autozero Exe
Confirmation of zero adjustment result

The zero adjustment result using the display can be confirmed with the following parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Autozero ► Result ► Zero value
Result
00 : 00
For the result of the zero adjustment, select “Result” and then “Zero value”.
▲
▼ Zero value
SET SFT INC
F0409.ai
Zero value
00 : 00
The result of zero adjustment is displayed as on the left of the screen.
– 00.018cm/s
– 00.018cm/s
– 99.999 + 99.999
SET SFT INC
F0410.ai
NOTE
When the zero adjustment result exceeds the defined value, the warning [092:AZ warn] is
displayed.
The zero adjustment result using HART communication can be confirmed with the following
parameters.
Menu path
HART Device root menu ► Basic setup ► Autozero ► Zero value
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 57
4.2 Totalization Function

4.2.1 Totalized Value and Unit Setting
This function can totalize the volumetric flow rate, mass flow rate, and calorie. This product has
three totalizers and can totalize 3 process values at the same time.
Totalizer 1 totalizes the values in the unit of the PV-mapped process value in Subsection 4.1.2.
Totalizers 2 and 3 totalize the process value of the selected unit.
This setting can be displayed and configured with the following parameters.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Totalizer 1 ► Unit Totalizer1 ► Total1 unit Displays the unit of totalizer 1.
Totalizer 2 ► Unit Totalizer2 ► Total2 unit Specifies the unit of totalizer 2.
Totalizer 3 ► Unit Totalizer3 ► Total3 unit Specifies the unit of totalizer 3.
NOTE
The flow velocity and flow noise cannot be totalized. If flow velocity or flow noise is selected for
the Primary Value, totalizer1 totalizes the volumetric flow rate and unit using “m3”.
4.2.2 Totalized Value Display and Totalization Function

The totalization result can be displayed with a totalized value or a totalized value which is scaled
with the conversion factor (totalized count value). When the totalized value is scaled with the
conversion factor, a specific flow rate is totalized in 1-count increments, which can be used as a
totalizer counter. However, note that the conversion factor cannot be set to “0”.
If the totalized value on the display exceeds ±99999999, the maximum value of the displayed
digits, the user can select whether to reset the displayed value to 0 or hold ±99999999.
The totalized value can be displayed and configured with the following parameters.
Displaying totalized value

Menu path
Display Device setup ► Process variables ► Totalizer ► (see below)
HART Process variables root menu ► Device variables ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Totalizer 1 Totalizer1 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 1.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 58
Setting conversion factor for scaling
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Totalizer1 ► Total1 conv
Totalizer 1 ► Conv factor Specifies the conversion factor of totalizer 1.
factor
factor
factor
Display of the totalized count value that is scaled with the conversion
factor
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Process variables ► Totalizer ► (see below)
HART Process variables root menu ► Totalizer count ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Totalizer 1 count Totalizer1 count Displays the scaled totalized value of totalizer 1.
Example:
Set the unit of totalizer 2 to “m3” and the conversion factor to 2.
->If the totalized value of totalizer 2 is set to “10.123 m3”, the totalized value is scaled to
“10.123÷2 = 5”.
Setting the user unit for the totalized count value scaled with the
conversion factor
This function is available when Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) is R2.02.01 or
later and Ind soft rev (Indicator board revision/Ind soft rev) is R2.02.01 or later.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Totalizer ►(see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Totalizer ►(see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Totalizer1 ► Total1 count Specifies the desired unit of up to 8 characters to
Totalizer 1► Count unit
unit the totalizer 1 count.
Totalizer 2 ► Count unit
Totalizer 3 ► Count unit
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 59
NOTE
When the totalized value on the display exceeds ±99999999 which is the maximum value of the
displayed digits, the behavior of the displayed value depends on the revision of Main soft rev
(Main board revision / Main soft rev) and Ind soft rev (Indicator board revision / Ind soft rev).
Main soft rev Ind soft rev Totalizer Operation
R1.01.06 or earlier R2.01.01 or earlier Holds upper limit
R1.01.07 R2.01.02 ~ R2.01.03 Resets to 0
R2.02.01 or later R2.02.01 or later Selectable to hold upper limit or reset to 0
Setting totalizer reset mode

This menu sets the behavior of the totalized value and the totalized count value when their upper
limits are exceeded can be set.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Totalizer ► Reset mode
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Totalizer ► Totalizer reset mode
From the table below, select the totalizer reset mode.

Selection
Description
Display HART
Off Off Holds at upper limit
On On Resets to 0
4.2.3 Totalization Switch Function

When a target value (threshold) to totalize is specified, it can be used as a totalization switch
function. The totalization switch function can compare the specified target value with the totalized
value and output the result in status output.
The status output is active while the totalized value exceeds the specified target value. Even if
the totalized value exceeds the displayed digit limit and is reset to 0 under that state, the status
output remains active.
For details about the output, active direction, and status output function setting for each terminal,
refer to Section 4.3.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Totalizer1 ► Total1 set
Totalizer 1 ► Set point Specifies the target value of totalizer 1.
point
point
point
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 60
Example:Setting procedure to use the totalization switch function with the pulse/status
output 1.
Follow the steps below to set the status output of pulse/status output 1 to “On active” when the
totalized value of totalizer 1 reaches the target value.
(1) Refer to Subsection 4.3.1 to specify the output of pulse/status output 1 to “Status output”.
(2) Refer to Subsection 4.3.5 to specify the active direction of pulse/status output 1 to
“On active”.
(3) Refer to Subsection 4.3.9 to specify the status output function to “Total limit 1”.
(4) Refer to this subsection to specify the target value of totalizer 1.
4.2.4 Totalizer Operation at Alarm Occurrence

The totalizer operation can be specified to deal with an alarm that affects the totalization function.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies totalizer 1 operation to be performed when
Totalizer 1 ► Failure opts Totalizer1 ► Total1 fail opts
an alarm occurs.
an alarm occurs.
an alarm occurs.
From the table below, select the operation of the totalization function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Measured value Measured value Continues the totalization function during an alarm.
Stop Stop Stops the totalization function during an alarm.
Continues the totalization function with the last valid
Last valid Last valid value right before the alarm occurred during an
alarm.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 61
4.2.5 Start/Stop Setting for Totalization Function

The start/stop operation of the totalization function can be set.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Totalizer1 ► Total1 Start/ Specifies Start/Stop to the totalization function of
Totalizer 1 ► Start/Stop
Stop totalizer 1.
Stop totalizer 2.
Stop totalizer 3.
NOTE
The totalization function is set to “Stop” at shipment from the manufacturing factory. To start the
totalization function, be sure to set it to “Start”.
4.2.6 Totalization Direction Setting

The totalization direction can be specified when using the totalization function.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Totalizer 1 ► Options Totalizer1 ► Total1 options Specifies the totalization direction of totalizer 1.
From the table below, select the totalization direction.

Selection
Description
Display HART
Totalizes the differential flow rate between the
Balanced Balanced
forward and reverse directions.
Absolute Absolute Totalizes the absolute value of the flow rate.
Only positive Only positive Totalizes only the flow rate in the forward direction.
Only negative Only negative Totalizes only the flow rate in the reverse direction.
Stops totalization processing (holds the current
Hold Hold
totalized value).
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 62
4.2.7 Totalized Value Reset/Preset Function

The reset/preset function can be specified for the totalized value. If the reset function is used,
the function resets the totalized value to “0”. If the preset function is used, it sets the preset value
specified in advance to the totalized value. The preset function is used when starting to count
totalization from the specified value.
Use of the reset/preset function

Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Totalizer1 ► Total1 Reset/
Totalizer 1 ► Reset/Preset Uses the reset/preset function of totalizer 1.
Preset
Preset
Preset
From the table below, select the reset/preset function.

Selection
Description
Display HART
Does not use the reset/preset function of the
Not execute Not execute
totalized value.
Reset Reset Uses the reset function of the totalized value.
Preset Preset Uses the preset function for the totalized value.
Preset value setting

Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Totalizer1 ► Total1 preset
Totalizer 1 ► Preset value Specifies the preset value of totalizer 1.
value
value
value
NOTE
The parameter returns to “Not execute” after the reset/preset function of the totalized value has
been completed.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 63
4.3 Pulse Output, Frequency Output, and Status

Output
4.3.1 Pulse/Status Output Mode Setting
Select the output mode of the pulse/status.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status out ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
PO1/SO1 ► Pulse/Status output1 ►
Specifies the output mode of pulse/status output 1.
Output mode Pulse1 output mode
Specifies the output mode of pulse/status output 2.
Output mode Pulse2 output mode
From the table below, select the output mode.

Selection
Description
Display HART
No function No function Does not use the terminal.
Fixed pulse output Fixed pulse output Specifies the output to the fixed width pulse output.
Specifies the output to the frequency output (Duty
Frequency output Frequency output
50%).
Specifies the output to the status output.
Status output Status output For details about the status output, refer to
Subsection 4.3.9.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 64
4.3.2 Pulse Output/Frequency Output Mapping

When using as a pulse output or frequency output, the process value to be output needs to be
selected.
For pulse/status output 1, a process value does not need to be set because the PV-mapped
process value in Subsection 4.1.2 is an output target.
For pulse/status output 2, the process value to be output can be selected among the flow velocity,
volumetric flow rate, mass flow rate, calorie, and flow noise.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status out ► PO2/SO2 ► Pulse select
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status output2 ►Pulse2 select
This parameter specifies a process value output from pulse/status output 2.

From the table below, select the process value to be output.
Selection
Description
Display HART
No connect Non-Connect No output.
Velocity Velocity Specifies the flow velocity to the output.
Volume flow Volume flow Specifies the volumetric flow rate to the output.
Mass flow Mass flow Specifies the mass flow rate to the output.
Specifies the calorie to the output.
Calorie Calorie
Specifies the flow noise to the output.
Diag Diag
4.3.3 Alarm Output Function

It is possible to specify the output behavior for when an alarm occurs while being used as a pulse
output or frequency output.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
PO1/SO1 ► Pulse/Status output1 ► Specifies the alarm output function of pulse output 1
Alarm out Pulse1 alarm out and frequency output 1.
PO2/SO2 ► Pulse/Status output2 ► Specifies the alarm output function of pulse output 2
Alarm out Pulse2 alarm out and frequency output 2.
From the table below, select the output operation of the alarm output function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
0 pps 0 pps No output.
Outputs the frequency or pulse with the measured
Measured value Measured value
value.
Outputs the frequency or pulse with the last valid
Last valid Last valid
value before an alarm activates.
Max pps Max pps Outputs the frequency or pulse at 12500 pps.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 65
4.3.4 Pulse Width Setting

The pulse width can be selected for use as a fixed width pulse.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the pulse width of pulse output 1.
Fix width Pulse1 fix width
Specifies the pulse width of pulse output 2.
Fix width Pulse2 fix width
From the table below, select the pulse width.

Pulse width [ms] Max. output frequency [Hz]
0.05 10000
0.1 5000
0.5 1000
1 500
20 25
33 15
50 10
100 5
200 2.5
330 1.5
500 1.0
1000 0.5
2000 0.25
Duty cycle 50%* ―
*: Available for Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) R2.02.01 or later and Ind soft rev (Indicator board revision/
Ind soft rev) R2.02.01 or later.
NOTE
The maximum pulse width when “Duty cycle 50%” is selected is up to 300 seconds (5 minutes).
To output pulse whose period exceeds 10 minutes, the pulse width is fixed to 300 seconds.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 66
4.3.5 Active Direction Setting

When the pulse output or status output is used, either ON or OFF can be set to active for the
pulse signal.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
PO1/SO1 ► Pulse/Status output1 ► Specifies the active direction of the pulse signal of
Active mode Pulse1 active mode pulse/status output 1.
PO2/SO2 ► Pulse/Status output2 ► Specifies the active direction of the pulse signal of
Active mode Pulse2 active mode pulse/status output 2.
Status output 3 ► Specifies the active direction of the pulse signal of
SO3 ►Active mode
Status output3 active mode status output 3.
From the table below, select the active direction of the pulse signal.
Selection
Description
Display HART
On active On active Sets to Active when the pulse signal is set on.
Off active Off active Sets to Active when the pulse signal is set off.
Example:
If the fixed pulse output is specified and the pulse width is set to “1 ms”, it is set to active as
shown below.
Active：ON
Active：OFF
1 ms F0411.ai
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 67
4.3.6 Active Pulse Setting

When communication and I/O code JG, L is selected, the sensor will be set and shipped so that
the sensor operates with pulse output 2 specified as a mechanical counter. This setting can be
changed by the customer.
The mechanical counter specifications have the following limitations.
Maximum pulse rate 2pps

Pulse width 20ms, 33ms, 50ms, 100ms
Active direction On active
Refer to the Installation Manual on how to connect with the mechanical counter.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status out ► PO2/SO2 ► Active pulse
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status output2 ► Active pulse
HART
mode
Selection
Description
Display HART
Normal Normal Normal pulse
For magnetic counter For magnetic counter Mechanical counter specification pulse
4.3.7 Pulse Rate Setting

When the pulse output is used, the pulse rate value per pulse and pulse rate scaling can be
specified.
The unit of the pulse rate is the same as the unit of the PV-mapped process value in Subsection
4.1.2.
This setting can be configured with the following parameters. If the pulse rate scaling is changed,
the pulse rate value is also converted to match the changed unit.
Pulse rate value

Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the pulse rate of pulse output 1.
Rate value Pulse1 rate value
Specifies the pulse rate of pulse output 2.
Rate value Pulse2 rate value
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 68
Scaling pulse rate
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status out ►( see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status ► ( see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
PO1/SO1 ► Pulse/Status output1 ► Specifies the scaling of the pulse rate of pulse
Rate unit Pulse1 rate unit output 1.
PO2/SO2 ► Pulse/Status output2 ► Specifies the scaling of the pulse rate of pulse
Rate unit Pulse2 rate unit output 2.
From the table below, select the pulse rate scaling.

n unit/P 10-9 × units per pulse
u unit/P 10-6 × units per pulse
m unit/P 10-3 × units per pulse
Unit/P 1 unit per pulse
k unit/P 103 × units per pulse
M unit/P 106 × units per pulse
n P/unit 10-9 × pulses per unit
u P/unit 10-6 × pulses per unit
m P/unit 10-3 × pulses per unit
P/unit 1 pulse per unit
k P/unit 103 × pulses per unit
M P/unit 106 × pulses per unit
Unit: The unit of the process value to be output as a pulse output
NOTE
The maximum pulse rate and pulse width must be specified so that the following conditions are
satisfied.
Maximum pulse rate value [pps]
= Flow rate span [Unit/s] × Pulse rate [P/Unit]
≤ 10 [k pps]
≤ 1 / (Pulse width × 2)
Example:
When the pulse width is set to “0.1 ms”, the maximum pulse rate value is set to “1 / (0.0001 × 2) =
5000 [pps]”. If the specified pulse rate exceeds this value, it causes a setting error, and an alarm
is displayed.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 69
4.3.8 Frequency Output Range Setting

When the frequency output is used, the frequency at 0% and 100% can be specified for the span
of the process value. The frequency output range can be set by specifying the frequency.
When the frequency output 1 is used, the output frequency is to be set for the span of the PV-
mapped process value in Subsection 4.1.2. When the frequency output 2 is used, the output
frequency is to be set for the span of the mapped process value in Subsection 4.3.2.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
PO1/SO1 ► Pulse/Status output1 ► Specifies the frequency when the process value to
Frequency at 0% Frequency1 at 0% be output with frequency output 1 is set to 0%.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 70
4.3.9 Status Output Function Setting

The product state can be output as a contact point to use the status output.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies status output 1 function.
SO1 function Status output1 function
Specifies status output 2 function.
SO2 function Status output2 function
Status output3 ►
SO3 ► Function Specifies status output 3 function.
Status output3 function
From the table below, select the status output function.

Selection
Description
Display HART
The status output is not available because the
No function No function
status output function is not enabled.
The status output is activated when an alarm
Alarm output Alarm output
occurs.
The status output is activated when a warning
Warning output Warning output
occurs.
The status output is activated when the totalized
value of totalizer 1 exceeds the specified target
Total limit 1 Total limit1
value. For details about the totalization switch
function, refer to Subsection 4.2.3.
The status output is activated when the PV-mapped
process value is equal to or lower than the specified
low limit (L) or equal to or greater than the specified
H/L alarm H/L alarm high limit (H).
For details about the PV mapping for the process
value and alarm information, refer to Subsection
4.1.2, Section 4.8, and Subsection 4.11.2.
The status output is active while the PV-mapped
process value is equal to or lower than the specified
low-low limit (LL) or equal to or greater than high-
HH/LL alarm HH/LL alarm high limit (HH).
For details about the PV mapping for the process
value and alarm information, refer to Subsection
4.1.2, Section 4.8, and Subsection 4.11.2.
Used for forward/reverse range. A flow rate can be
measured by switching analog output 1 between the
forward range and reverse range in response to a
Fwd/Rev range Fwd/Rev range
flow direction. The status output is activated when
the present range is the reverse range. For details,
refer to Subsection 4.6.4.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 71
Selection
Description
Display HART
Used for the multi range. A flow rate can be
measured while switching analog output 1 between
range 1 and range 2 in response to the flow rate.
Auto 2 range Auto2 range
The status output is activated when the present
range is range 2. For details, refer to Subsection
4.6.3.
The status output is active when the present range
Ext 2 answer Ext2 answer is range 2 while operating with Ext 2 range settings.
For details, refer to Subsection 4.6.7.
The status output is activated when System alarm
System alarm* System alarm*
occurs. Can be specified only with status output 2.
The status output is activated when Process alarm
Process alarm* Process alarm*
The status output is activated when Setting alarm
Setting alarm* Setting alarm*
The status output is activated when Signal overflow
Signal overflow* 50:Sig overflow*
The status output is activated when Empty pipe
Empty detect* 51:Empty detect* detection occurs. Can be specified only with status
output 2.
The status output is activated when Adhesion over
Adh over lv 4* 53:Adh over lv4* level 4 occurs. Can be specified only with status
output 2.
The status output is activated when Cable
Cable miscon* 85:Cable miscon* misconnect occurs. Can be specified only with
status output 2.
The status output is activated when Coil insulation
Coil insulation* 86:Coil insulate*
The status output is activated when Adhesion lv 3
Adhesion lv 3* 87:Adh over lv3*
The status output is activated when Low
LC warn* 88:LC warn* conductivity Warning occurs. Can be specified only
with status output 2.
The status output is activated when Insulation
Insu detect* 89:Insu detect* detection occurs. Can be specified only with status
output 2.
The status output is activated when Flow noise over
FLN over lv 3* 90:FLN over lv3* level 3 occurs. Can be specified only with status
output 2.
The status output is activated when Flow noise over
FLN over lv 4* 91:FLN over lv4* level 4 occurs. Can be specified only with status
output 2.
The status output is activated when Verification
Verif warn* 93:Verif warn* warning occurs. Can be specified only with status
output 2.
The status output is activated when Factory noise
Fact noise warn* 94:FC noise warn* warning occurs. Can be specified only with status
output 2.
process value is equal to or less than the low limit
Low alarm* Lo alarm*
(L) and exceeds the low-low limit value (LL). Can be
specified only with status output 2.
process value is equal to or less than the specified
LL alarm* Lo Lo alarm*
low-low limit value (LL). Can be specified only with
status output 2.
process value is equal to or greater than the
High alarm* Hi alarm* specified high limit (H) and no more than the high-
high limit (HH). Can be specified only with status
output 2.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 72
Selection
Description
Display HART
process value is equal to or greater than the
HH alarm* Hi Hi alarm*
specified high-high limit (HH). Can be specified only
with status output 2.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 73
4.3.10 Pulse Option Setting

An instantaneous flow rate is totalized for the fixed width pulse output or frequency output and
is output as a pulse when the totalized value exceeds 1. With the pulse option, the totalization
method can be selected.

Parameter
Description
Display HART
Pulse/Status outpu1 ►
PO1/SO1 ► Options Specifies pulse 1 option.
Pulse1 option
Pulse/Status outpu2 ►
PO2/SO2 ► Options Specifies pulse 2 option.
Pulse2 option
Selection
Description
Display HART
Totalizes a flow rate in the forward direction with a
positive value and a flow rate in the reverse direction
Balanced Balanced with a negative value, and outputs a value as a
pulse if the forward and negative totalized values
exceed 1.
Totalizes an absolute value of the flow rate and
Absolute Absolute
outputs it as a pulse if the totalized value exceeds 1.
Totalizes only a flow rate in the forward direction and
Only positive Only positive outputs it as a pulse if the totalized value exceeds 1.
(The negative flow rate is not totalized as 0)
Converts a negative flow rate to a positive value and
totalizes it. Outputs the value as a pulse if the value
Only negative Only negative exceeds 1.
(The negative flow rate is not totalized in the forward
direction as 0)
Use “Balanced” and “Absolute” in the following cases.

When raising 0% point with frequency output
Setting example)
Pulse mode = Freq, Freq at 0% = 100Hz, Freq at 100% = 500Hz, Pulse option = Balanced
Balanced
Since 100Hz is output at 0% with the above settings, an instantaneous flow rate can be
measured up to -25% in frequency output.
(Possible to use in the same way as the analog output)
When using in combination with forward/reverse range
Setting example)
Pulse mode = Fixed, Pulse option = Absolute, SO function = Fwd/Rev range
Absolute
Please set your desired value for pulse width / rate / rate unit, and reverse span1.
With the above settings, the same pulse output can be reproduced as when the forward/reverse
range setting is made with the old model AXF.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 74
4.4 Status Input

4.4.1 Active Direction Setting for Status Input
When the status input is used, either ON or OFF can be set to active for the status input.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Status in ► SI3 ► Active mode
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status ► Status input 3 ► Status input3 active
HART
mode
From the table below, select the active direction of the status input.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Specifies the status input to Active when it is
On active Short(On) act
shorted-circuited.
Off active Open(Off) act Specifies the status input to Active when it is open.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 75
4.4.2 Status Input Function Setting

When the status input is used, the function of the status input can be set.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Status in ► SI3 ► Function
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Pulse/Status ► Status input 3 ► Status input3 function
From the table below, select the status input function.

Selection
Description
Display HART
The status input is not available because the status
input function is not enabled.
Analog output 1 is fixed at 4 mA when the status
0% signal lock 0% Signal Lock
input becomes active.
The zero adjustment function is automatically used
when the status input is active. Note that zero
Ext auto zero Ext auto zero adjustment cannot be stopped even if the status
input is changed while the zero adjustment function
is used.
The preset value specified in Subsection 4.2.7 is
Total preset 1 Total preset 1 set as the value for totalizer 1 and totalization starts
from the value when the status input is active.
set as the value for totalizer 2 and totalization starts
Total preset 2 Total preset 2
from the value when the status input becomes
active.
set as the value for totalizer 3 and totalization starts
Total preset 3 Total preset 3
from the value when the status input becomes
active.
The range of analog output 1 is switched from range
1 to range 2 while the status input is active. Used for
Ext 2 ranges Ext2 ranges External Contact Range.
For details on the external contact range, refer to
Subsection 4.6.6.
A flow rate is fixed at 0 when the status input
0% signal lock 2* 0% Signal Lock 2* becomes active. Due to this, the analog output,
pulse output and flow rate on the display become 0.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 76
4.5 Analog Input and Analog Output

4.5.1 Analog Output Select
The process value to be assigned to analog output 2 is set.
In the case of analog output 1, the process value does not need to be set because the PV-
mapped process value in Subsection 4.1.2 is an output target.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ► AO2 ► AO2 select
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Analog output/input ► Analog output 2 ► AO2 select
From the table below, select the process value for the analog output.
Selection
Description
Display HART
No connect Non-Connect No output.
Velocity Velocity Specifies the flow velocity to the output.
Volume flow Volume flow Specifies the volumetric flow rate to the output.
Mass flow Mass flow Specifies the mass flow rate to the output.
Calorie Calorie Specifies the calorie to the output.
Diag Diag Specifies the flow noise to the output.
4.5.2 Display Analog Output

The current value of the analog output can be checked with the following parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Process variables ► (see below)
HART Process variables root menu ► View outputs ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
AO1 AO1 current Displays the current value of analog output 1.
Displays the current value of analog output 2.
AO2 AO2 current
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 77
4.5.3 Analog Output High/Low Limit Function

The high and low limits of the analog output can be set for each terminal.
The high limit can be limited between 4.0 mA and 21.6 mA, and the low limit to between 2.4 mA
and 20.0 mA.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
AO1 ► Analog output1 ►
Specifies the high limit of analog output 1.
High limit AO1 high limit
AO1 ► Analog output1 ►
Specifies the low limit of analog output 1.
Low limit AO1 low limit
AO2 ► Analog output2 ► Specifies the high limit of analog output 2.
High limit AO2 high limit (Only available for AXG, not for AXW)
AO2 ► Analog output2 ► Specifies the low limit of analog output 2.
Low limit AO2 low limit (Only available for AXG, not for AXW)
Example:
If the high limit is set to 16 mA and the low limit to 8 mA, the result is as shown below.
Current [mA]
Current output before
20 limit function applied. High limit
16
12
4 Low limit
0 Time
F0412.ai
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 78
4.5.4 Absolute Range Function

The absolute range function is available for using analog output 1. If the absolute range function
is used, the forward flow rate and reverse flow rate toward a span can be output to analog output
at the same time. With 0% flow rate set at 12 mA, the reverse flow rate can be output to an
analog output of 4 to 12 mA, and the forward flow rate to an analog output of 12 to 20 mA.
The absolute range function and low-cut function can be used at the same time. For details about
the low-cut function, refer to Subsection 4.1.7.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ► AO1 ► Range mode
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Analog output/input ► Analog output1 ► AO1 range
HART
mode
This parameter sets the use of the absolute range function for analog output 1.
From the table below, select the use of the absolute range function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Normal range Normal range Does not use the absolute range function.
Abs range Abs range Uses the absolute range function.
Example:
(1) With absolute range and no low cut
Current [mA]
20
16
12
Flow rate [%]

-100 0 100 F0413.ai
(2) With absolute range and low cut

Current [mA]
20
16
Low cut
12
Flow rate [%]

-100 0 100 F0414.ai
NOTE
The absolute range function and multi range function cannot be used at the same time.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 79
4.5.5 Alarm Output Function

Behavior of the analog output when a target alarm occurs can be set with the alarm output
function.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
AO1 ► Analog output1 ► Specifies the alarm output function of analog output
Alarm out AO1 alarm out 1.
AO2 ► Analog output2 ► Specifies the alarm output function of analog output
Alarm out AO2 alarm out 2. (Only available for AXG, not for AXW)
From the table below, select the use of the alarm output function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
< 2.4 mA < 2.4 mA Outputs lower than 2.4 mA.
3.8 mA 3.8 mA Outputs 3.8 mA.
4 mA 4 mA Outputs 4 mA.
20.5 mA 20.5 mA Outputs 20.5 mA.
> 21.6 mA > 21.6 mA Outputs higher than 21.6 mA.
Outputs measured current (the current value is
undefined due to an error).
Outputs current that is applied when an alarm
Hold Hold
occurs.
4.5.6 Analog Output Priority

The function of the prioritized analog output varies depending on the settings of the product.
Priority
Output mode
level
HART multi-drop mode, fixed output of 4 mA
(For details, refer to Subsection 3.6.3.)
High Test mode bit

(For details, refer to Section 4.12.)
Status input function
Output of 0% signal lock
Alarm output function
Verification function, Output during offline diagnosis

Low
Normal output
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 80
4.5.7 Current Value Adjustment

After the sensor is installed to the customer’s piping, an analog input value or analog output value
can be adjusted in the customer’s installation environment To adjust an analog output value,
output currents of 4 mA and 20 mA from this product, connect an ammeter for calibration, and
measure the current value.
Set the measured current value to the parameter and adjust the analog output value.
To adjust the analog input value, input currents of 4 mA and 20 mA from an external device, and
display the analog input value on the display of this product. For details about settings of the
display item, refer to Subsection 4.9.2.
Set the displayed analog value (adjusted value) to the parameter and adjust the analog input
value.
Analog input
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► AO/AI trim ► AI trim ► (see below)
HART Maintenance root menu ► AO/AI trim ► AI trim ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the adjustment value when inputting 4 mA
Trim 4mA
of analog input.
AI trim
Specifies the adjustment value when inputting 20
Trim 20mA
mA of analog input.
Clears the adjustment value for inputting analog
Trim clear Clear AI trim
input.
Analog output
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► AO/AI trim ► AO trim ► (see below)
HART Maintenance root menu ► AO/AI trim ► AO trim ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the adjustment value of analog output 1
AO1 trim 4mA
(4 mA).
AO1 trim
AO1 trim 20mA
(20 mA).
AO1 trim clear Clear D/A trim 1 Clears the adjustment value of analog output 1.
AO2 trim 4mA
(4 mA). (Only available for AXG, not for AXW)
AO2 trim
AO2 trim 20mA
(20 mA). (Only available for AXG, not for AXW)
Clears the adjustment value of analog output 2.
AO2 trim clear Clear D/A trim 2
IMPORTANT
If the input/output does not agree with the readings of the current value when the current value
adjustment function is used, readjust the current value.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 81
4.5.8 Analog Input Function Setting

A process value from an external device can be imported to the product as an analog input.
The analog input can be used for temperature-based density correction calculation and calorie
calculation by using the analog input as a temperature input.
For details about the temperature-input density correction calculation and calorie calculation,
refer to Subsections 4.7.5 and 4.7.6.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ► AI ► Function
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Analog output/input ► Analog input ► AI function
This parameter specifies the analog input function.

From the table below, select the analog input function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
An analog input is not available because the analog
input function is not enabled.
The analog input value can be monitored.
However, this function does not give any influences
Monitoring Monitoring
on either the density correction calculation or the
calorie calculation.
The analog input is used as the temperature
Diff temperature Diff temperature difference.
Calorie can be calculated.
The analog input is used as absolute temperature.
Ext temperature Ext temperature
Density correction and calorie can be calculated.
4.5.9 Display Analog Input

The current value of the analog input can be checked with the following parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ► AI ► Value
HART Process variables root menu ► View inputs ► AI current
4.5.10 Analog Input Unit Setting

A unit can be set for when an analog input is used as an input for temperature.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ► AI ► Unit
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Analog output/input ► Analog input ► AI unit
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 82
4.5.11 Analog Input Range Setting

A range can be set for the process value for the analog input by specifying 0% and 100% of the
process value for the analog input. The unit for the range is the same as the unit specified in
Subsection 4.5.10.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ► AI ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Analog output/input ► Analog input ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the value that is at the 100% point of the
URV AI URV
process value for the analog input.
Specifies the value that is at the 0% point of the
LRV AI LRV
process value for the analog input.
4.5.12 Analog Input High/Low Limit Function

High and low limits can be set for the analog input.
The high limit can be set to between 4.0 mA and 21.6 mA, and the low limit to between 2.4 mA
and 20.0 mA.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Analog out/in ► AI ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Analog output/input ► Analog input ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the high limit value of the analog input
High limit AI high limit
value.
Specifies the low limit value of the analog input
Low limit AI low limit
value.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 83
4.6 Multi Range Function

4.6.1 Multi Range type
The multi range function can be used for analog output 1. The multi range function shows the
present range with the status input or status output. The multi range function makes it possible to
measure a span for the PV-mapped process value in Subsection 4.1.2 while switching multiple
ranges.
The multi range function has three ranges; the multi range, the forward/reverse range, and the
external contact range, and one of the ranges should be selected.
The contents of each range are as follows:
The state of the range is output in the status output by measuring a flow while switching
Multi range
several ranges in response to flow rate.
Forward/Reverse The state of the range is output in the status output by measuring a flow while switching
range several ranges in response to the flow direction.
External Contact
Flow is measured while switching several ranges by using the status inputs.
Range
NOTE
• The absolute range function and multi range function cannot be used at the same time.
• The multi range function is not available for analog output 2.
4.6.2 Multi Range Setting

When using the multi range function, each range needs to be configured. For unit setting, refer to
Subsection 4.1.4.
This setting can be configured with the following parameters. Refer to Subsection 4.1.5. for the
span setting (forward span 1) when the multi range function is not used.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Multi range ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Multi range ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Forward span 2 Forward span 2 Specifies forward span 2.
Reverse span 1 Reverse span 1 Specifies reverse span 1.
Reverse span 2 Reverse span 2 Specifies reverse span 2.
The type of the range for the multi range function can be set with the status output and status
input functions. For details, refer to Subsections 4.3.9. and 4.4.2.
It is necessary to set a span for each range in response to the range type of the multi range
function. Set each span value so as to satisfy the relation of lower range ≤ upper range.
For example, if the forward/reverse range is to be used in combination with the multi range (range
1 and 2), spans of forward span 1, forward span 2, reverse span 1, and reverse span 2 need to
be set, and the relations of forward span 1 ≤ forward span 2 and reverse span 1 ≤ reverse span 2
should be satisfied.
If these conditions are not met, “Analog output 1 multi range error” occurs and the multi range
function does not operate.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 84
4.6.3 Multi Range Operation

The multi range allows two ranges to be automatically switched for measurement in response to
the flow rate. When a measured flow rate is larger than the lower range, the range is switched
to the higher range. When a measured flow rate is smaller than the higher range, the range is
switched to the lower range.
The range being used is shown with the state of the status output. When the multi range is used
in range 1 and 2, the relation of the range and status output is as follows:
Range State of status output (auto 2 range indicated)
Forward span 1 Not active
Forward span 2 Active
When the range is switched from the higher range to the lower range, it has hysteresis. The
hysteresis sets a percentage for the lower range.
The hysteresis for multi range switching can be set with the following parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Multi range ► Auto range hyst
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Multi range ► Auto range hyst
When multi range is used in range1 and 2, the multi range can be set with the following
procedures.
(1) Refer to Subsection 4.1.2 to specify the PV process value.
(2) Refer to Subsections 4.1.4 and 4.1.5 to specify the span (forward span 1).
(3) Specify the multi range switching hysteresis.
(4) Refer to Subsection 4.3.1 to specify the output of the terminal to the status output.
(5) Refer to Subsection 4.3.9 to specify the status output function to auto 2 range.
(6) Refer to Subsection 4.6.2 to specify forward span 2.
Specify a value greater than forward span 1.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 85
Example:
PV = Volumetric flow rate,
Flow rate span (range 1) = 50 m3/h,
Range 2 = 100 m3/h,
When set to Hysteresis width = 10 %
->Hysteresis value = 50 [m3/h] × 10 [%]
= 5 [m3/h]
(1) When the range is switched from lower range 1 to higher range 2
Output [%]
Forward range 1
Forward range 2
100
0 50 100 Flow rate

[m3/h]
Status output
F0415.ai
(2) When the range is switched from higher range 2 to lower range 1 (waiting for hysteresis)
Output [%]
Forward range 1
Forward range 2
100
0 45 50 100 Flow rate

[m3/h]
Status output
F0416.ai
NOTE
To change the PV process value set in Subsection 4.1.2, it is necessary to re-set the multi range.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 86
4.6.4 Forward/Reverse Range

In the forward/reverse range, this product measures a flow by automatically switching the forward
direction range (forward range) and reverse direction range (reverse range) in response to the
flow direction. Both the forward range and reverse range can be set for the range, respectively.
The range being used is shown with the state of the status output. When the forward/reverse
range is used, the relation of the range and status output is as follows:
State of the status output
Flow direction Range
(Forward/Reverse range)
Forward Forward span 1 Not active
Reverse Reverse span 1 Active
When the range is switched from the forward range to the reverse range, it has hysteresis. The
hysteresis sets a percentage for either the forward range or the reverse range, whichever is
smaller.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Multi range ► Bi direction hyst
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Multi range ► Bi direction hyst
The forward/reverse range can be configured with the following procedure.

(3) Specify the forward/reverse range switching hysteresis.
(4) Refer to Subsection 4.3.1 to specify the output of the terminal to the status output.
(5) Refer to Subsection 4.3.9 to specify the status output function to Fwd/Rev range.
(6) Refer to Subsection 4.6.2 to specify reverse span 1.
NOTE
If Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) is R2.02.02 or later, when the Forward/
Reverse function is switched between enabled and disabled by changing the Forward/Reverse
range-related parameters, a value equivalent to 3% of the span is automatically set in the Total/
Pulse low cut parameter.
To set an arbitrary low cut value, set the Total/Pulse low cut parameter after the above settings.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 87
Example:
Flow rate span (forward span 1) = 50 m3/h,
Reverse span 1 = 100 m3/h,
When set to Hysteresis = 5 %
-> Because of Forward range< Reverse range
Hysteresis value = 50 [m3/h] × 5 [%]
= 2.5 [m3/h]
(1) When the range is switched from the reverse range to the forward range (waiting for
hysteresis)
Output [%]
Forward
Reverse range 1 range 1
100
Flow rate
-100 0 50 [m3/h]
2.5
Status output
F0417.ai
(2) When the range is switched from the forward range to the reverse range (waiting for
hysteresis)
Output [%]
Forward
Reverse range 1 range 1
100
Flow rate
-100 0 50 [m3/h]
-2.5
Status output
F0418.ai
NOTE
To change the PV process value set in Subsection 4.1.2, it is necessary to re-set the forward/
reverse range.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 88
4.6.5 Combination of Multi Range and Forward/Reverse

Range
The multi range can be used in combination with the forward/reverse range for this product.
When the multi range (range 1 to 2) and the forward/reverse range are combined, the relation of
the range and status output is as follows:
State of the status output State of the status output
Flow direction Range
(Forward/Reverse range) (Auto 2 range)
Forward span 2 Not active Active
Forward
Forward span 1 Not active Not active
Reverse span 1 Active Not active
Reverse
Reverse span 2 Active Active
The multi range and the forward/reverse range each have a different hysteresis. For the
hystereses of the multi range and the forward/reverse range, refer to Subsections 4.6.3 and
4.6.4.
The combination of the forward/reverse range and the multi range (ranges 1 through 2) can be
set using the following procedures.
(3) Refer to Subsections 4.6.3 and 4.6.4 to specify the hystereses for the multi range and the
forward/reverse range.
(4) Refer to Subsection 4.3.1 to specify the output of each terminal to the status output.
(5) Refer to Subsection 4.3.9 to specify the status output function to auto 2 range and forward/
reverse range.
(6) Refer to Subsection 4.6.2 to specify forward span 2, reverse span 1, and reverse span 2.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 89
4.6.6 External Contact Range

The external contact range can be used with this product. In the external contact range, a flow
rate can be measured by arbitrarily switching two ranges in response to status input.
The relation between a range and the status input is as follows:
State of status input
Range
(Ext 2 ranges)
Not active Range 1
Active Range 2
When using the external contact range in ranges 1 and 2, it can be set with the following
procedures.
(3) Refer to Subsection 4.4.2 to specify the function of the status input to Ext 2 ranges.
Example:
When setting the forward span 2 = 100 m3/h
Output [%]
Forward range 1
Forward range 2
100
Flow rate
0 50 100
[m3/h]
Status input
F0419.ai
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 90
4.6.7 External Contact Range (with Answer)

This product can display the present range in the form of the state of status output while
operating in the external contact range.
The relation between a range and the status output is as follows:
State of status input State of the status output
Range
(Ext 2 ranges) (Ext 2 answer)
Not active Range 1 Not active
Active Range 2 Active
The external contact range with answer can be configured using the following procedure.
(4) Refer to Subsection 4.3.9 to specify the function of the status output to Ext 2 answer.
Example:
When setting to forward span 2 = 100 m3/h
Output
Forward range 1
Forward range 2
100
Flow rate
0 50 100 [m3/h]
Status input
Status output
F0446.ai
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 91
4.6.8 Combination of External Contact Range and Forward/

Reverse Range
The external contact range can be used in combination with the forward/reverse range for this
product. The relation of the range and status output is as follows when the forward/reverse range
and External Contact Range (range 1 and 2) are combined.
Condition Operation
Flow State of status input State of the status output State of the status output
Range
direction (Ext 2 ranges) (Forward/Reverse range) (Ext 2 answer)
Active Forward span 2 Not active Active
Forward
Not active Forward span 1 Not active Not active
Not active Reverse span 1 Active Not active
Reverse
Active Reverse span 2 Active Active
The combination of the forward/reverse range and the external contact range (range 1 and 2) can
be set in the following procedures.
(2) Refer to Subsections 4.1.4 and 4.1.5 to specify span (forward span 1).
(3) Refer to Subsections 4.6.3 and 4.6.4 to specify the hystereses for the multi range and the
forward/reverse range.
(4) Refer to Subsection 4.3.9 to specify the function of the status output to the forward/reverse
range.
(6) Refer to Subsection 4.6.2 to specify forward span 2, reverse span 1, and reverse span 2.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 92
4.7 Auxiliary Calculation Function

4.7.1 Fluid Flow Direction Setting
The arrow on the surface of the sensor indicates the fluid flow direction. Upon shipment from the
manufacturing factory, the flow rate is measured assuming that the arrow direction is forward.
By changing the parameter settings, this product can measure the flow rate, assuming that the
reverse direction is forward against the arrow direction.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► AUX calculation ► Flow direct
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► AUX calculation ► Flow direction
This parameter specifies the fluid flow direction.

From the table below, select the fluid flow direction.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Forward Forward The arrow direction of the sensor is forward.
The reverse direction of the arrow of the sensor is
Reverse Reverse
forward.
4.7.2 Rate Limit Function Setting

If the rate limit function is used, it becomes possible to reduce noises that cannot all be cleared
only by lengthening the damping time constant. When a step signal or a sudden signal due to a
slurry fluid is input, this function judges whether the signal is a flow rate signal or a noise signal.
This judgment is made based on the high/low limit value (rate limit value) and the rate limit
function continuation time (dead time), causing the noise signal over the rate limit value to be cut
off.
The rate limit value is specified with the percentage (%) for the span of the PV-mapped process
value in Subsection 4.1.2. The dead time is set to “0” if the rate limit function is not used.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► AUX calculation ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► AUX calculation ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Rate limit Rate limit Specifies the rate limit value.
Dead time Dead time Specifies the dead time.
Specifies the noise filter (rate limit value and dead
Noise filter Noise filter
time).*1
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 93
*1: From the table below, select the noise filter (rate limit value and dead time).
Selection
Rate limit value Dead time
Display HART
The value is specified The value is specified
Manual Manual in the parameter in the parameter
“Rate limit”. “Dead time”.
Level 1 Level 1 0.5% 0.5s
NOTE
If either the rate limit value or the dead time is specified, the noise filter is set to “Manual”.
NOTE
Determining the rate limit value and dead time
The Rate limit value: The Dead time (T0):
Determine the level which should be cut the output Determine the value depending on the width of the output
fluctuation. For example, if its level is 2%, the noise of fluctuation. Choose the larger value when the noise which
2% or larger would be cut as shown in the following is over the dead time as shown in the following figure.
figure.
T0
2%
2%
T0
F0420.ai
NOTE
For the rate limit function, the dead time is set to “0” upon shipment from the manufacturing
factory.
Be sure to set the dead time when the rate limit function is used.
Signal processing for rate limit function

The product calculates to set the specific rate limit value to the primary delay response value of
the previously sampled flow rate value. If the flow rate value sampled at this time exceeds the
rate limit value above, its high or low limit is set to the flow rate value at this time. Furthermore,
if the sampling count occurs within the dead time while the signal over the high/low limit is in the
same direction, this signal is judged to be a flow rate signal.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 94
Example:
(1) When input = 0 to 10%, Damping time constant = 5 seconds, Dead time = 3 seconds,
and Rate limit value = 1%, the output for the step input is obtained as shown below.
Input: 0 to 10%
Damping time constant: 5 s
Dead time: 3 s
Step signal Rate limit value: 1%
10%
Flow rate value 63.2%

after rate limit
processing
(c)
(b) (d) Flow rate value
(a)
1% after damping
100 225 Number of signal samples
Deat time: 3 s F0421.ai
• In condition (a), the signal exceeds the rate limit value as compared with the previous value;
therefore, the response is set to 1%.
The actual output, which is damped, is processed as indicated by the solid line.
• Then, the flow rate value in the dead time is set to “flow rate after damping calculation +
signal of rate limit value (1%)”.
• The input signal does not return to the rate limit value or less within the dead time; therefore,
it is judged to be a flow rate signal at the time of (c).
• The output signal starts following the step signal along the damping curve.
The figure below shows an output example when a slurry noise has occurred.
(2) When input = 0 to 10%, Damping time constant = 1 second, Dead time = 1 seconds,
and Rate limit value = 1%, the output for a slurry noise is obtained as shown below.
Input: 0 to 10%
Damping time constant: 1 s
Dead time: 1 s
Slurry noise
Rate limit value: 1%
Flow rate value
after rate limit
+1% processing
In the figure on the left,
-1% it is determined that the
slurries noise signal is
Flow rate value after damping not a flow rate signal.
Time F0422.ai
Dead time: 1 s
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 95
4.7.3 Pulsing Flow Support Function Setting

If a plunger pump is used, it may cause an error in the average of the flow rate due to the
influence of the pulsing flow. If the pulsing flow support function is used, an error due to a pulsing
flow can be reduced by following a flow change while controlling the flow rate calculation.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► AUX calculation ► Pulsing flow
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► AUX calculation ►Pulsing flow
This parameter specifies the use of the pulsing flow support function.
From the table below, select the use of the pulsing flow support function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
No No Do not use the pulsing flow support function.
Yes Yes Use the pulsing flow support function.
4.7.4 Power Frequency Synchronization Setting

This function can be specified whether the excitation frequency (internal signal processing
frequency) and power frequency are synchronous or asynchronous.
When setting the excitation frequency and power frequency to asynchronous, the excitation
frequency is determined by the set value of the power frequency.
The power frequency synchronous/asynchronous mode and the power frequency can be
configured with the following parameters.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Sets the excitation frequency and power frequency
Power sync Power synchronize
to synchronous.*1
Sets the power frequency when the excitation
Set power freq Set power frequency
frequency and power frequency are asynchronous.
*1: Sets the synchronous/asynchronous mode of power frequency from the table below.
Selection
Description
Display HART
No No
asynchronous.
Yes Yes
synchronous.
IMPORTANT
When using the DC power as the transmitter power, set the commercially available power
frequency of the place where the transmitter will be used.
In this case, set “Power sync” to Off first before setting “Set power freq”.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 96
The excitation frequency and power frequency can be checked with the following parameters.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Displays the power frequency (synchronous with the
Iex power frequency IEX power frequency
excitation frequency).
Meas power freq Measured power frequency Displays the measured power frequency.
4.7.5 Density Correction Calculation

When the temperature from another device (temperature transmitter, etc.) is used as an
analog input, the density correction calculation can be performed based on temperature. The
measurement accuracy for the mass flow rate is improved by using this function.
Transmitter
24 V Iin+
Temperature
transmitter, etc.
0V Iin-
F0423.ai
The mass flow rate is obtained using the following formula.

Vm=Vf×ρ
Vm: Mass flow rate [kg/s]
Vf: Volumetric flow rate [m3/s]
ρ: Density [kg/m3]
When the density correction calculation is performed based on temperature, the density is
obtained using the following formula. The density compensating rates must be specified
depending on applications that use this product.
ρr=ρn×{1+a1×(Tr-Tn)×10-2+a2×(Tr-Tn)2×10-6}
ρr: Density corrected based on the measured temperature [kg/m3]
ρn: Standard density [kg/m3]
Tr: Measured temperature [°C]
Tn: Standard temperature [°C]
a1: Primary compensating rate
a2: Secondary compensating rate
The standard temperature and the compensating rates can be configured with the following
parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► Temperature ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Process variables ► Temperature ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Coef A1 Temp coef A1 Specifies the primary compensating rate.
Coef A2 Temp coef A2 Specifies the secondary compensating rate.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 97
The density correction calculation can be set using the following procedure.
(1) Refer to Subsection 4.11.1 to specify the use of the temperature corrected density.
(2) Refer to Subsection 4.5.8 to specify the function of the analog input to temperature.
(3) Refer to Subsection 4.5.11 to specify the range of the analog input.
(4) Refer to Subsections 4.1.11 and 4.1.12 to specify the standard temperature and standard
density.
(5) Specify the primary compensating rate and secondary compensating rate of the
compensation formula.
NOTE
The density correction calculation is performed only when items (1) and (2) above are specified.
If they are not specified, the density is assigned to the fixed value that is specified in Subsection
4.1.11.
Example:
If a water density is corrected based on the temperature in the following conditions, the result is
obtained as shown below.
analog input range = 0.0 to 100.0°C,
Standard density = 1000 kg/m3,
Standard temperature = 20°C,
Primary compensating rate = -0.02, Secondary compensating rate = -3.9
1000
990
Density [kg/m3]
980
970
960
950
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature [°C] F0424.ai
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 98
4.7.6 Calorie Calculation

This function is only available for AXG, not for AXW.
When the absolute temperature or the temperature difference from another device (temperature
transmitter, etc.) is used as the analog input, the calorie calculation is executable.
The calorie is obtained using the following formula.

Q = c×Vm×∆t
Q: Calorie [J/s]
c: Specific heat [J/kg•K]
Vm: Mass flow rate [kg/s]
∆t: Temperature difference [K]
The temperature difference of Δt varies depending on the analog input function specified in
Subsection 4.5.8. If “Diff temperature” is selected in the analog input function, the temperature
input in the form of analog input is used. If “Ext temperature” is selected, the difference between
the temperature used as the analog input and the reference temperature specified in Subsection
4.1.12 is used.

Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Pro var ► Calorie ► Specific heat
HART Device root menu ► Basic setup ► Calorie ► Specific heat
This parameter specifies the specific heat.
The calorie calculation can be configured using the following procedure.
• When the absolute temperature is selected as the analog input:

(1) Refer to Subsection 4.5.8 to specify the function of the analog input to “Ext temperature”.
(3) Refer to Subsection 4.1.12 to specify the reference temperature.
(4) Specify the specific heat.
• When the temperature difference is selected as the analog input:

(1) Refer to Subsection 4.5.8 to specify the function of the analog input to “Diff temperature”.
(3) Specify the specific heat.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 99
4.7.7 Limit of Alarm Output Function

The alarm output function of analog output 1 can be limited. For details about the alarm output
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► AUX calculation ► Set SIL
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► AUX calculation ► Set SIL
From the table below, select the use of the alarm output function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Does not restrict the alarm output function of analog
No No
output 1.
Yes Yes Limits the alarm output function of analog output 1.
NOTE
If this function is set to “Yes”, the alarm output function for analog output 1 is to be limited to
“< 2.4 mA” and “> 21.6 mA”. If another option is set, the alarm output function for analog output 1
is set to “> 21.6 mA”.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 100
4.8 Alarm
4.8.1 Errors and Countermeasures
Explanation of NE107 status:
NE107 status Status of the device
F Failure Device malfunction, Parts malfunction
The output signal is temporarily invalid for the local operation or manual operation
C Function Check
input.
The device works in out of specification.
S Out of specification
The output signal is uncertain for the process or the ambiance.
Maintenance
M The maintenance is required in the near future.
required
N No Effect State other than mentioned above
The following table shows possible countermeasures.
System alarm
The device breaks down and causes abnormal measurement.
Device replacement is needed.
NE107 Error Message
Error Description Countermeasure
Status Display HART
Main board CPU CPU (Main board) Contact Yokogawa
F 010:Main CPU FAIL 10
failure failure was detected. service center.
Failure of reverse
Reverse Contact Yokogawa
F 011:Rev calc FAIL 11 calculation was
calculation failure service center.
detected.
Turn on the power
again within the range
of the temperature
Failure of EEPROM
Main board specifications. If the
F 012:Main EEP FAIL 12 (Main board) was
EEPROM failure situation does not
detected.
improve, contact
Yokogawa service
center.
EEPROM (Main board)
Main board Contact Yokogawa
F 013:Main EEP dflt 13 was reset to default
EEPROM default service center.
values.
Sensor board Failure of sensor board Contact Yokogawa
F 014:Snsr bd FAIL 14
failure was detected. service center.
Sensor Communication error
Contact Yokogawa
F 015:Snsr comm ERR 15 communication of the sensor was
service center.
error detected.
Failure of A/D
A/D1 transmitter 1 [flow Contact Yokogawa
F 016:AD 1 FAIL[Sig] 16
failure[Signal] velocity signal] was service center.
detected.
Failure of A/D
A/D2 Contact Yokogawa
F 017:AD 2 FAIL[Excit] 17 transmitter 2 [Exciting
failure[Exciter] service center.
current] was detected.
Turn off the power,
Coil of sensor was
F 018:Coil open 18 Coil open check coil of sensor
disconnected.
and excitation cable.
Coil of sensor was Contact Yokogawa
F 019:Coil short 19 Coil short
shorted. service center.
Failure of the excitation Contact Yokogawa
F 020:Exciter FAIL 20 Exciter failure
circuit was detected. service center.
Error of pulse width
Contact Yokogawa
F 021:PWM 1 stop 21 PWM1 stop modulation 1 was
service center.
detected.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 101
NE107 Error Message

Status Display HART
Error of pulse width
Contact Yokogawa
F 022:PWM 2 stop 22 PWM2 stop modulation 2 was
service center.
detected.
Option board Mismatch of option Contact Yokogawa
F 023:Opt bd mismatch 23
mismatch board was detected. service center.
Failure of EEPROM
Option board Contact Yokogawa
F 024:Opt bd EEP FAIL 24 (option board) was
EEPROM failure service center.
detected.
Option board A/D Failure of A/D (option Contact Yokogawa
F 025:Opt bd A/D FAIL 25
failure board) was detected. service center.
Option board SPI Failure of SPI (option Contact Yokogawa
F 026:Opt bd SPI FAIL 26
failure board) was detected. service center.
Parameter Retry the restore
Restore of parameters
F 027:Restore FAIL 27 restore function of the
was failed.
incomplete parameter.
Check that the
ambient temperature
of display is within the
Indicator board Failure of display board
F 028:Ind bd FAIL 28 range. If the situation
failure was detected.
does not improve,
contact Yokogawa
service center.
Turn on the power
again within the range
of the temperature
Failure of EEPROM
Indicator board specifications. If the
F 029:Ind bd EEP FAIL 29 (display board) was
EEPROM failure situation does not
detected.
improve, contact
Yokogawa service
center.
Failure of display driver Contact Yokogawa
F 030:LCD drv FAIL 30 LCD driver failure
was detected. service center.
Indicator board Mismatch of display Contact Yokogawa
F 031:Ind bd mismatch 31
mismatch board was detected. service center.
Indicator Communication error Check that the main
F 032:Ind comm ERR 32 communication of display board was and display boards
error detected. are connected.
microSD card Failure of microSD card Replace the microSD
F 033:microSD FAIL 33
Failure was detected. card.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 102
Process alarm
The device works normally, but some issue of the process causes abnormal measurement.
Maintenance work is needed.
NE107 Error Message
Status Display HART
Check the signal and
Failure of input signal
S 050:Signal overflow 50 Signal overflow grounding cables are
was detected.
connected.
Inside of sensor was
Empty pipe Fill the sensor with
S 051:Empty detect 51 detected to be empty.
detection water.
(Empty check)
Check the parameter
A flow rate exceeds the
H/L or HH/LL setting related to flow
N 052:H/L HH/LL alm 52 high/low limits or high-
alarm rate and alarm high/
high/low-low limits.
low limit function.
The resistance value
of the electrodes
Adhesion over exceeded Level 4. Recommend cleaning
S 053:Adh over lv 4 53
level 4 (Adhesion detection electrode.
of insulation to the
electrode)
Setting alarm
The device works normally, but the parameter setting error occurs.
Parameter setting is needed.
NE107 Error Message
Status Display HART
Setting error of flow
Span Check the parameter
span was detected.
S 060:Span cfg ERR 60 configuration setting related to
(fulfill “0.05 m/s < span
error span.
flow rate < 16 m/s”)
PV flow select Flow noise was set to Check or change
S 061:PV F cfg ERR 61 configuration PV when flow noise the PV FLOW SEL
error could not be used. parameter setting.
Analog output Setting error of analog Check the parameter
S 062:AO 1 4-20 lmt 62 1 4-20mA limit output 1 was detected. setting related to
error (fulfill “LRV < HRV”) analog output 1.
Analog output Setting error of analog Check the parameter
S 063:AO 2 4-20 lmt 63 2 4-20mA limit output 2 was detected. setting related to
error (fulfill “LRV < HRV”) analog output 2.
Setting error of the
multi range function
was detected. (Span
value settings of each
range do not satisfy the
relationship of lower
Check the parameter
Analog output 1 range ≤ higher range,
S 064:AO 1 mlt rng 64 setting related to the
multi range error multi range settings
multi range.
for the status input
and status output are
erroneous, or the multi
range and the absolute
range are selected at
the same time)
Setting error of the
alarm high/low limit Check the parameter
H/L HH/LL
function was detected. setting related to the
N 065:H/L cfg ERR 65 configuration
(fulfill “HRV - LRV > alarm high/low limit
error
Hysteresis” and “HHRV function.
- LLRV > Hysteresis”)
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 103
NE107 Error Message

Status Display HART
Setting error of density
Density Check the parameter
value was detected
S 066:Density cfg ERR 66 configuration setting related to
when PV was set to
error density.
mass flow rate.
Pulse output 1 Check the parameter
Setting error of pulse
S 067:Pls 1 cfg ERR 67 configuration setting related to
output 1 was detected.
error pulse output 1.
Pulse output 2 Check the parameter
Setting error of pulse
S 068:Pls 2 cfg ERR 68 configuration setting related to
output 2 was detected.
error pulse output 2.
Configuration error
of nominal size was
detected.
Nominal size Check the parameter
(fulfill “0.99 mm <
C 069:Nomi size cfg 69 configuration setting related to
nominal size of sensor <
error nominal size.
3000.10 mm (0.01 inch
< nominal size of sensor
< 120.10 inch)”)
Setting error of
electrode adhesion
Adhesion Check the parameter
detection function was
C 070:Adh cfg ERR 70 configuration setting related to
detected.
error adhesion detection.
(fulfill “Level1 < Level2 <
Level3 < Level4”)
Setting error of flow
Flow noise noise verification Change the
C 071:FLN cfg ERR 71 configuration function was detected. parameter settings
error (fulfill “Level1 < Level2 < related to flow noise.
Level3 < Level4”)
Data logging not Data logging failed to Insert the microSD
C 072:Log not start 72
started start. card.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 104
Warning
The device works normally and measurement is also normal but warning occurs.
NE107 Error Message
Status Display HART
Check the parameter
Analog output 1 Saturation of Analog settings related to the
S 080:AO 1 saturate 80
saturated output 1 was detected. process value and
analog output 1.
Check the parameter
Analog output 2 Saturation of Analog settings related to the
S 081:AO 2 saturate 81
analog output 2.
Check the parameter
Pulse output 1 Saturation of pulse setting related to
S 082:Pls 1 saturate 82
pulse output 1.
Check the parameter
Pulse output 2 Saturation of pulse setting related to
S 083:Pls 2 saturate 83
pulse output 2.
Check analog input
Analog input Saturation of Analog value and analog
S 084:AI saturate 84
saturated input was detected. input parameter
setting.
Check the signal
Cable Misconnection of cable
C 085:Cable miscon 85 cable and excitation
misconnect was detected.
cable connection.
Coil insulation Insulation deterioration Contact Yokogawa
C 086:Coil insulation 86
warning of the coil was detected. service center.
The resistance value
of the electrodes
Adhesion over exceeded Level 3. Recommend cleaning
M 087:Adhesion lv 3 87
level 3 (Adhesion detection electrode.
of insulation to the
electrode)
Decrease of
Low conductivity Check fluid
N 088:LC warn 88 conductivity was
warning conductivity.
detected.
Insulation deterioration
Insulation Contact Yokogawa
M 089:Insu detect 89 of electrode was
detection service center.
detected.
Check if there is a
Flow noise exceeded
Flow noise over problem with the fluid
N 090:FLN over lv 3 90 Level 3.
level 3 (conductivity, bubble,
(Detection of flow noise)
etc.).
Check if there is a
Flow noise exceeded
Flow noise over problem with the fluid
N 091:FLN over lv 4 91 Level 4.
level 4 (conductivity, bubble,
(Detection of flow noise)
etc.).
Result of zero Check fluid is stopped
C 092:AZ warn 92 Autozero warning adjustment exceeded when executing zero
10 cm/s. adjustment.
Interruption of
Verification Execute Verification
C 093:Verif warn 93 verification function was
warning again.
detected.
Factory noise The fluctuation of flow Check if there is a
C 094:Fact noise warn 94
warning became larger. problem with the fluid.
A test mode for the flow
velocity, volumetric flow
rate, mass flow rate,
Release simulation or
C 095:Simulate active 95 Simulation active calorie, analog output,
test mode.
pulse output, status
input, or status output
was executed.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 105
NE107 Error Message

Status Display HART
Check whether
Analog output 1 It was detected that
S 096:AO 1 fix 96 analog output 1 is in
fixed analog output 1 is fixed.
the test mode or not.
Check whether
Analog output 2 It was detected that
S 097:AO 2 fix 97 analog output 2 is in
fixed analog output 2 is fixed.
the test mode or not.
Check whether pulse
Pulse output 1 It was detected that
S 098:Pls 1 fix 98 output 1 is in the test
fixed pulse output 1 is fixed.
mode or not.
Check whether pulse
Pulse output 2 It was detected that
S 099:Pls 2 fix 99 output 2 is in the test
fixed pulse output 2 is fixed.
mode or not.
Check whether the
Analog input It was detected that the
S 100:AI fix 100 analog input is in the
fixed analog input is fixed.
test mode or not.
The restore function
Parameter
C 101:Param restore run 101 of the parameter was —
restore running
executed.
The number of digits Check the parameter
Display over
N 102:Disp over 102 available for display setting related to
warning
exceeded the limit. display.
Free space of microSD Increase the free
microSD card
N 103:SD size warn 103 card decreased to less space of the microSD
size warning
than 10%. card.
Parameter Retry the backup
Parameter backup
M 104:Bkup incmplt 104 backup function of the
failed.
incomplete parameter.
microSD card Mismatch of microSD Replace the microSD
S 105:SD mismatch 105
mismatch card was detected. card.
After executing
the removal of the
microSD
Removal of microSD microSD card with
M 106:SD removal ERR 106 card removal
card failed. parameter, remove
procedure error
the microSD card
from the product.
Mismatch of the sensor
Transmitter type Contact Yokogawa
N 131:Trans mismatch 131 and transmitter was
mismatch service center.
detected.
Information
The device works normally and measurement is also normal. These messages are just reference
information.
NE107 Error Message
Status Display HART
Error of Watchdog timer Contact Yokogawa
N 120:Watchdog 120 Watchdog
was detected. service center.
N 121:Power off 121 Power off Power-off was detected. —
Instant power Instantaneous power
N 122:Inst power FAIL 122 —
failure failure was detected.
Parameter Parameter backup is
N 123:Param bkup run 123 —
backup running running.
Data logging
N 124:Data log run 124 Data log is running. —
running
Device ID not No settings of Device ID Contact Yokogawa
N 130:DevID not enter 130
entered was detected. service center.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 106
4.8.2 Operation at the Time of Error

The following table shows the behavior of outputs and readings at the time of error.
System alarm
Output
NE Process
Error Message Pulse/ Totalizer Display
107 Alarm Warning Current Value
Status
Non- Not
F 010:Main CPU FAIL Active Burnout Stop Stop Stop
Active defined
Non- Alarm Based on Normal
F 011:Rev calc FAIL Active Alarm Out Alarm
Active Out “FailOpts” Operation
F 012:Main EEP FAIL Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 013:Main EEP dflt Active Alarm Out Alarm
Non- Alarm Based on Hold Prior
F 014:Snsr bd FAIL Active Alarm Out Alarm
Active Out “FailOpts” setting
Non- Based on Hold Prior
F 015:Snsr comm ERR Active Burnout Alarm Out Alarm
Active “FailOpts” setting
F 016:AD 1 FAIL[Sig] Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 017:AD 2 FAIL[Excit] Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 018:Coil open Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 019:Coil short Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 020:Exciter FAIL Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 021:PWM 1 stop Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 022:PWM 2 stop Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 023:Opt bd mismatch Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 024:Opt bd EEP FAIL Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 025:Opt bd A/D FAIL Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 026:Opt bd SPI FAIL Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 027:Restore FAIL Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 028:Ind bd FAIL Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 029:Ind bd EEP FAIL Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 030:LCD drv FAIL Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 031:Ind bd mismatch Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 032:Ind comm ERR Active Alarm Out Alarm
F 033:microSD FAIL Active Alarm Out Alarm
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 107
Process alarm
Output
NE Process
Status
Hold
Non- Alarm Based on
S 050:Signal overflow Active Alarm Out Prior Alarm
Active Out “FailOpts”
setting
Hold
Non- Alarm Based on
S 051:Empty detect Active Alarm Out Prior Alarm
Active Out “FailOpts”
setting
Non- Normal
N 052:H/L HH/LL alm Active Normal Normal Continue Alarm
Active Operation

S 053:Adh over lv 4 Active Alarm Out Alarm
Setting alarm
Output
NE Process
Status
S 060:Span cfg ERR Active Alarm Out Alarm
S 061:PV F cfg ERR Active Alarm Out Alarm
Non- Normal
S 062:AO 1 4-20 lmt Active Normal Normal Continue Alarm
Active Operation
Non- Normal
S 063:AO 2 4-20 lmt Active Normal Normal Continue Alarm
Active Operation
N 065:H/L cfg ERR Active Normal Alarm
S 066:Density cfg ERR Active Alarm Out Alarm
Non- Alarm Normal
S 067:Pls 1 cfg ERR Active Alarm Out Continue Alarm
Active Out Operation
Non- Alarm Normal
S 068:Pls 2 cfg ERR Active Alarm Out Continue Alarm
Active Out Operation
C 069:Nomi size cfg Active Alarm Out Alarm
Non- Normal
C 070:Adh cfg ERR Active Normal Normal Continue Alarm
Active Operation
Non- Normal
C 071:FLN cfg ERR Active Normal Normal Continue Alarm
Active Operation
Non- Normal
C 072:Log not start Active Normal Normal Continue Alarm
Active Operation
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 108
Warning
Output
NE Process
Status
Non- Normal
S 080:AO 1 saturate Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
S 081:AO 2 saturate Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
S 082:Pls 1 saturate Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
S 083:Pls 2 saturate Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
S 084:AI saturate Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
C 085:Cable miscon Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
C 086:Coil insulation Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
M 087:Adhesion lv 3 Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
N 088:LC warn Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
M 089:Insu detect Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
N 090:FLN over lv 3 Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
N 091:FLN over lv 4 Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
C 092:AZ warn Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
C 093:Verif warn Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
C 094:Fact noise warn Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
C 095:Simulate active Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
S 096:AO 1 fix Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
S 097:AO 2 fix Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
S 098:Pls 1 fix Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
S 099:Pls 2 fix Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
S 100:AI fix Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
C 101:Param restore run Active Normal Normal Continue Execute
Active Operation
Non- Normal
N 102:Disp over Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
N 103:SD size warn Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
M 104:Bkup incmplt Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
S 105:SD mismatch Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
M 106:SD removal ERR Active Normal Normal Continue Warning
Active Operation
Non- Normal
N 131:Trans mismatch Active Normal Normal Continue Normal
Active Operation
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 109
Information
Output
NE Process
Status
Non- Normal
N 120:Watchdog Active Normal Normal Continue Normal
Active Operation
Non- Normal
N 121:Power off Active Normal Normal Continue Normal
Active Operation
Non- Normal
N 122:Inst power FAIL Active Normal Normal Continue Normal
Active Operation
Non- Normal
N 123:Param bkup run Active Normal Normal Continue Execute
Active Operation
Non- Normal
N 124:Data log run Active Normal Normal Continue Icon
Active Operation
Non- Normal
N 130:DevID not enter Active Normal Normal Continue Normal
Active Operation
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 110
4.8.3 Alarm Display Setting

(1) Alarm display
If an error occurs on this product, an alarm appears on the display. The alarm display modes
are classified into two types: one mode to display a process value and alarm name, and another
mode to display an alarm name and action.
If multiple alarms occur on this product, they will be displayed in sequence on the display.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ► Alarm display
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► Display operation configuration ►
HART Display alarm
This parameter sets the alarm display.

From the table below, select the alarm display.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Normal Normal Displays the process value and alarm name.
01 : 00
0.00000 m/s VEL
0.0 % FLP
4.000 mA AO1
018: Coil open
SET SFT INC
F0425.ai
Detail Detail Displays the alarm name and action.

01 : 00
System Alarm
018: Coil open
Cut the power and
check coil & EX cable.
SET SFT INC
F0426.ai
(2) Alarm display based on NAMUR NE107

A prefix can be assigned to the alarm name based on NAMUR NE107.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ► NE107 display
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► Display operation configuration ► Display
HART NE107
This parameter sets the alarm display based on NAMUR NE107.

From the table below, select the alarm display.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Normal Normal Sets to the normal alarm display.
NE107 NE107 Sets the alarm display based on NAMUR NE107.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 111
4.8.4 Alarm History Function

The alarm history function can record an alarm that occurred in the past in the history.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Sts/Self test ► Alarm ► Alarm record ► (see below)
HART Diagnostic root menu ► Status/Self test ► Alarm ► Alarm record ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Record alarm 1 Alarm record 1 Displays the name of new alarm 1.
Displays the operation time when the first new alarm
Record time 1 Alarm record time 1
occurs.
Displays the operation time when the second new
alarm occurs.
Displays the operation time when the third new
alarm occurs.
Displays the operation time when the fourth new
alarm occurs.
The operation time when an alarm occurred is displayed in the format of “dddddD hh:mm”.
“dddddD” indicates the day, “hh” indicates the hour, and “mm” indicates the minute.
Example:
“00031D 12:34” is displayed.
This example shows that an alarm has occurred when the product has been operated for 31
days, 12 hours, and 34 minutes.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 112
4.8.5 Alarm Mask Function

The alarm mask function can be configured so that a set alarm is masked, alarm notifications are
hidden, and the alarm history is not recorded. The mask function can be set for both the alarm
notification and alarm record, respectively.
Alarm notification mask

If the alarm notification mask function is turned “On”, it disables alarm notification.
Setting example for alarm “Signal overflow”:
To disable the alarm notification, set “Signal overflow on” of Alarm out mask to “On”.
To enable the alarm notification, set “Signal overflow on” of Alarm out mask to “Off”.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Sts/Self test ► Alarm ► Alarm out mask ► (see below)
HART Diagnostic root menu ► Status/Self test ► Alarm ► Alarm out mask ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the mask function for alarm notification
Mask 1-1
1-1.
Alarm out mask 1
Mask 1-2
1-2.
Mask 2-1
2-1.
Alarm out mask 2
Mask 2-2
2-2.
Mask 3-1
3-1.
Alarm out mask 3
Mask 3-2
3-2.
Mask 4-1 Alarm out mask 4
4-1.
Alarm record mask

If the alarm record mask function is turned “On”, it disables the alarm record.
Setting example for alarm “Empty pipe detection”:
To disable the alarm record, set “Empty pipe detection on” of Alarm out mask to “On”.
To enable the alarm record, set “Empty pipe detection on” of Alarm record mask to “Off”.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Sts/Self test ► Alarm ► Alarm record mask ► (see below)
HART Diagnostic root menu ► Status/Self test ► Alarm ► Alarm record mask ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Mask 1-1 Specifies the mask function for alarm record 1-1.
Alarm record mask 1
Alarm record mask 2
Mask 3-1 Alarm record mask 3 Specifies the mask function for alarm record 3-1.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 113
NOTE
Note that an alarm masked by the alarm notification mask function is not recorded in the alarm
record.
The alarm mask function setting is as follows:

Parameter name Indicates the name of the mask setting parameter.
Alarm name Indicates the alarm name.
Indicates the default value (upon shipment from the manufacturing factory). (: Masked,
Default value
-: Not masked)
Indicates whether the mask setting is enabled or disabled. (: Setting enabled, -: Setting
Attribute
disabled)
Alarm notification mask function

Display HART Default
Attribute
Parameter name Alarm name Parameter name Alarm name value
Main board CPU
― 010:Main CPU FAIL ― 10 ― ―
failure
Reverse calculation
― 011:Rev calc FAIL ― 11 ― ―
failure
Main board EEPROM
― 012:Main EEP FAIL ― 12 ― ―
failure
Main board EEPROM
Mask 1-1 013:Main EEP dflt Alarm out mask 1 13 ― 
default
― 014:Snsr bd FAIL ― 14 Sensor board failure ― ―
Sensor
― 015:Snsr comm ERR ― 15 ― ―
communication error
― 016:AD 1 FAIL[Sig] ― 16 A/D1 failure[Signal] ― ―
― 017:AD 2 FAIL[Excit] ― 17 A/D2 failure[Exciter] ― ―
― 018:Coil open ― 18 Coil open ― ―
― 019:Coil short ― 19 Coil short ― ―
― 020:Exciter FAIL ― 20 Exciter failure ― ―
Mask 1-2 021:PWM 1 stop Alarm out mask 1 21 PWM1 stop ― 
Mask 1-2 022:PWM 2 stop Alarm out mask 1 22 PWM2 stop ― 
Option board
Mask 1-2 023:Opt bd mismatch Alarm out mask 1 23 ― 
mismatch
Option board
Mask 1-2 024:Opt bd EEP FAIL Alarm out mask 1 24 ― 
EEPROM failure
Option board A/D
Mask 1-2 025:Opt bd A/D FAIL Alarm out mask 1 25 ― 
failure
Option board SPI
Mask 1-2 026:Opt bd SPI FAIL Alarm out mask 1 26 ― 
failure
Parameter restore
― 027:Restore FAIL ― 27 ― ―
incomplete
Mask 1-2 028:Ind bd FAIL Alarm out mask 1 28 Indicator board failure  
Indicator board
Mask 1-2 029:Ind bd EEP FAIL Alarm out mask 1 29 ― 
EEPROM failure
Mask 1-2 030:LCD drv FAIL Alarm out mask 1 30 LCD driver failure ― 
Indicator board
Mask 1-2 031:Ind bd mismatch Alarm out mask 1 31 ― 
mismatch
Indicator
Mask 1-2 032:Ind comm ERR Alarm out mask 1 32 ― 
communication error
Mask 1-2 033:microSD FAIL Alarm out mask 1 33 microSD failure ― 
Mask 2-1 050:Signal overflow Alarm out mask 2 50 Signal overflow ― 
Mask 2-1 051:Empty detect Alarm out mask 2 51 Empty pipe detection ― 
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 114
Attribute
Mask 2-1 052:H/L HH/LL alm Alarm out mask 2 52 H/L or HH/LL alarm  
Mask 2-1 053:Adh over lv 4 Alarm out mask 2 53 Adhesion over level 4  
Span configuration
Mask 2-1 060:Span cfg ERR Alarm out mask 2 60 ― 
error
PV flow select
Mask 2-1 061:PV F cfg ERR Alarm out mask 2 61 ― 
configuration error
Analog output 1
Mask 2-1 062:AO 1 4-20 lmt Alarm out mask 2 62 ― 
4-20mA limit error
Analog output 2 4-20
Mask 2-1 063:AO 2 4-20 lmt Alarm out mask 2 63 ― 
mA limit error
Analog output 1 multi
Mask 2-1 064:AO 1 mlt rng Alarm out mask 2 64 ― 
range error
H/L HH/LL
Mask 2-1 065:H/L cfg ERR Alarm out mask 2 65 ― 
configuration error
Density configuration
Mask 2-1 066:Density cfg ERR Alarm out mask 2 66 ― 
error
Pulse output 1
Mask 2-2 067:Pls 1 cfg ERR Alarm out mask 2 67 ― 
configuration error
Pulse output 2
Mask 2-2 068:Pls 2 cfg ERR Alarm out mask 2 68 ― 
configuration error
Nominal size
Mask 2-2 069:Nomi size cfg Alarm out mask 2 69 ― 
configuration error
Adhesion
Mask 2-2 070:Adh cfg ERR Alarm out mask 2 70 ― 
configuration error
Flow noise
Mask 2-2 071:FLN cfg ERR Alarm out mask 2 71 ― 
configuration error
Data logging not
Mask 2-2 072:Log not start Alarm out mask 2 72 ― 
started
Analog output 1
Mask 2-2 080:AO 1 saturate Alarm out mask 2 80 ―*2 
saturated
Analog output 2
Mask 2-2 081:AO 2 saturate Alarm out mask 2 81  
saturated
Pulse output 1
Mask 2-2 082:Pls 1 saturate Alarm out mask 2 82  
saturated
Pulse output 2
Mask 2-2 083:Pls 2 saturate Alarm out mask 2 83  
saturated
Mask 2-2 084:AI saturate Alarm out mask 2 84 Analog input saturated  
Mask 2-2 085:Cable miscon Alarm out mask 2 85 Cable misconnect ― 
Mask 2-2 086:Coil insulation Alarm out mask 2 86 Coil insulation warning  
Transmitter type
Mask 2-2 131:Trans mismatch Alarm out mask 2 131 ― 
mismatch
Mask 3-1 087:Adhesion lv 3 Alarm out mask 3 87 Adhesion over level 3  
Low conductivity
Mask 3-1 088:LC warn Alarm out mask 3 88  
warning
Mask 3-1 089:Insu detect Alarm out mask 3 89 Insulation detection  
Mask 3-1 090:FLN over lv 3 Alarm out mask 3 90 Flow noise over level 3  
Mask 3-1 091:FLN over lv 4 Alarm out mask 3 91 Flow noise over level 4  
Mask 3-1 092:AZ warn Alarm out mask 3 92 Autozero warning ― 
Mask 3-1 093:Verif warn Alarm out mask 3 93 Verification warning  
Mask 3-1 094:Fact noise warn Alarm out mask 3 94 Factory noise warning  
Mask 3-1 095:Simulate active Alarm out mask 3 95 Simulation active ― 
Mask 3-1 096:AO 1 fix Alarm out mask 3 96 Analog output 1 fixed ― 
Mask 3-1 097:AO 2 fix Alarm out mask 3 97 Analog output 2 fixed ― 
Mask 3-1 098:Pls 1 fix Alarm out mask 3 98 Pulse output 1 fixed ― 
Mask 3-1 099:Pls 2 fix Alarm out mask 3 96 Pulse output 2 fixed ― 
Mask 3-1 100:AI fix Alarm out mask 3 100 Analog input fixed ― 
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 115
Attribute
Parameter restore
Mask 3-2 101:Param restore run Alarm out mask 3 101  
running
Mask 3-2 102:Disp over Alarm out mask 3 102 Display over warning  
microSD card size
Mask 3-2 103:SD size warn Alarm out mask 3 103  
warning
Parameter backup
Mask 3-2 104:Bkup incmplt Alarm out mask 3 104 ― 
incomplete
microSD card
Mask 3-2 105:SD mismatch Alarm out mask 3 105  
mismatch
microSD card removal
Mask 3-2 106:SD removal ERR Alarm out mask 3 106  
procedure error
Mask 3-2 120:Watchdog*1 Alarm out mask 3 120 Watchdog*1  
Mask 3-2 121:Power off*1 Alarm out mask 3 121 Power off*1  
Mask 3-2 122:Inst power FAIL*1 Alarm out mask 3 122 Instant power failure*1  
Parameter backup
Mask 3-2 123:Param bkup run Alarm out mask 3 123  
running
Mask 3-2 124:Data log run Alarm out mask 3 124 Data logging running  
Mask 4-1 130:DevID not enter Alarm out mask 4 130 Device ID not entered  
*1: Recorded in the alarm record regardless of the settings of the alarm notification mask function.
*2: When Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) is R2.01.01 or earlier, the default value is “: Masked”.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 116
Alarm record mask function
Attribute
Main board CPU
― 010:Main CPU FAIL ― 10 ― ―
failure
Reverse calculation
― 011:Rev calc FAIL ― 11 ― ―
failure
Main board EEPROM
― 012:Main EEP FAIL ― 12 ― ―
failure
Alarm record Main board EEPROM
Mask 1-1 013:Main EEP dflt 13 ― 
mask 1 default
― 014:Snsr bd FAIL ― 14 Sensor board failure ― ―
Sensor
― 015:Snsr comm ERR ― 15 ― ―
communication error
― 016:AD 1 FAIL[Sig] ― 16 A/D1 failure[Signal] ― ―
― 017:AD 2 FAIL[Excit] ― 17 A/D2 failure[Exciter] ― ―
― 018:Coil open ― 18 Coil open ― ―
― 019:Coil short ― 19 Coil short ― ―
Alarm record
Mask 1-2 021:PWM 1 stop 21 PWM1 stop ― 
mask 1
Alarm record
Mask 1-2 022:PWM 2 stop 22 PWM2 stop ― 
mask 1
Alarm record Option board
Mask 1-2 023:Opt bd mismatch 23 ― 
mask 1 mismatch
Alarm record Option board
Mask 1-2 024:Opt bd EEP FAIL 24 ― 
mask 1 EEPROM failure
Alarm record Option board A/D
Mask 1-2 025:Opt bd A/D FAIL 25 ― 
mask 1 failure
Alarm record Option board SPI
Mask 1-2 026:Opt bd SPI FAIL 26 ― 
mask 1 failure
Parameter restore
― 027:Restore FAIL ― 27 ― ―
incomplete
Alarm record
Mask 1-2 028:Ind bd FAIL 28 Indicator board failure ― 
mask 1
Alarm record Indicator board
Mask 1-2 029:Ind bd EEP FAIL 29 ― 
mask 1 EEPROM failure
Alarm record
Mask 1-2 030:LCD drv FAIL 30 LCD driver failure ― 
mask 1
Alarm record Indicator board
Mask 1-2 031:Ind bd mismatch 31 ― 
mask 1 mismatch
Alarm record Indicator
Mask 1-2 032:Ind comm ERR 32 ― 
mask 1 communication error
Alarm record
Mask 1-2 033:microSD FAIL 33 microSD failure ― 
mask 1
Alarm record
Mask 2-1 050:Signal overflow 50 Signal overflow ― 
mask 2
Alarm record
Mask 2-1 051:Empty detect 51 Empty pipe detection ― 
mask 2
Alarm record
Mask 2-1 052:H/L HH/LL alm 52 H/L or HH/LL alarm ― 
mask 2
Alarm record
Mask 2-1 053:Adh over lv 4 53 Adhesion over level 4 ― 
mask 2
Span configuration
― 060:Span cfg ERR ― 60  ―
error
PV flow select
― 061:PV F cfg ERR ― 61  ―
configuration error
Analog output 1
― 062:AO 1 4-20 lmt ― 62  ―
4-20mA limit error
Analog output 2 4-20
― 063:AO 2 4-20 lmt ― 63  ―
mA limit error
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 117
Attribute
Analog output 1 multi
― 064:AO 1 mlt rng ― 64  ―
range error
H/L HH/LL
― 065:H/L cfg ERR ― 65  ―
configuration error
Density configuration
― 066:Density cfg ERR ― 66  ―
error
Pulse output 1
― 067:Pls 1 cfg ERR ― 67  ―
configuration error
Pulse output 2
― 068:Pls 2 cfg ERR ― 68  ―
configuration error
Nominal size
― 069:Nomi size cfg ― 69  ―
configuration error
Adhesion
― 070:Adh cfg ERR ― 70  ―
configuration error
Flow noise
― 071:FLN cfg ERR ― 71  ―
configuration error
Data logging not
― 072:Log not start ― 72  ―
started
Analog output 1
― 080:AO 1 saturate ― 80  ―
saturated
Analog output 2
― 081:AO 2 saturate ― 81  ―
saturated
Pulse output 1
― 082:Pls 1 saturate ― 82  ―
saturated
Pulse output 2
― 083:Pls 2 saturate ― 83  ―
saturated
― 084:AI saturate ― 84 Analog input saturated  ―
Alarm record
Mask 2-2 085:Cable miscon 85 Cable misconnect ― 
mask 2
― 086:Coil insulation ― 86 Coil insulation warning  ―
Transmitter type
― 131:Trans mismatch ― 131  ―
mismatch
― 087:Adhesion lv 3 ― 87 Adhesion over level 3  ―
Low conductivity
― 088:LC warn ― 88  ―
warning
― 089:Insu detect ― 89 Insulation detection  ―
― 090:FLN over lv 3 ― 90 Flow noise over level 3  ―
― 091:FLN over lv 4 ― 91 Flow noise over level 4  ―
― 092:AZ warn ― 92 Autozero warning  ―
― 093:Verif warn ― 93 Verification warning  ―
― 094:Fact noise warn ― 94 Factory noise warning  ―
― 095:Simulate active ― 95 Simulation active  ―
― 096:AO 1 fix ― 96 Analog output 1 fixed  ―
― 097:AO 2 fix ― 97 Analog output 2 fixed  ―
― 098:Pls 1 fix ― 98 Pulse output 1 fixed  ―
― 099:Pls 2 fix ― 99 Pulse output 2 fixed  ―
― 100:AI fix ― 100 Analog input fixed  ―
Parameter restore
― 101:Param restore run ― 101  ―
running
― 102:Disp over ― 102 Display over warning  ―
microSD card size
― 103:SD size warn ― 103  ―
warning
Parameter backup
― 104:Bkup incmplt ― 104  ―
incomplete
microSD card
― 105:SD mismatch ― 105  ―
mismatch
microSD card removal
― 106:SD removal ERR ― 106  ―
procedure error
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 118
Attribute
― 120:Watchdog*1 ― 120 Watchdog*1 ― ―
― 121:Power off*1 ― 121 Power off*1 ― ―
― 122:Inst power FAIL*1 ― 122 Instant power failure*1 ― ―
Parameter backup
― 123:Param bkup run ― 123  ―
running
― 124:Data log run ― 124 Data logging running  ―
Alarm record
Mask 3-1 130:DevID not enter 130 Device ID not entered  
mask 3
*1: Recorded in the alarm record regardless of the settings of the alarm notification mask function.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 119
4.8.6 Burnout Direction Display

The burnout function sets an analog output direction when a CPU failure occurs. The analog
output direction at burnout can be checked with the following parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► H/L alarm cfg ► 4-20 burnout
HART Diagnostic root menu ► Status/Self test ► Burn out
Displays burn out direction

Selection
Description
Display HART
High High Outputs 21.6 mA or more at burnout.
Low Low Outputs 2.4 mA or less at burnout.
NOTE
If the optional code C1 or C2 is selected, the burnout direction is set to “Low”. Otherwise, the
direction is set to “High”.
Also, the burnout direction can be changed with the hardware burnout switch. For details about
the hardware burnout switch, be sure to refer to the Installation Manual.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 120
4.9 Display
4.9.1 Language Setting
The language to be shown on the display can be selected from nine languages.
Select the desired display language from the languages that are included in the language
package specified at the time of order.
Selecting language
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Language
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► Display operation configuration ► Language
This parameter specifies the language to be used on the display.

From the table below, select the language to be used on the display.
Selection
Description
Display HART
English English
French French
German German Package 1:
Italian Italian Japanese, English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish, Portuguese, Russian
Spanish Spanish
Portuguese Portuguese Package 2:
Russian Russian English, Chinese
Chinese Chinese
Japanese Japanese
Display of language package

Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ► Language package
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► Display operation configuration ► Language
HART
package
This parameter indicates the language package for the display.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 121
4.9.2 Display Item Setting

This product can show up to eight items on the display by scrolling it. Each display item is to be
set to the eight-line mode.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Line select ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► Line select ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Line 1 Display select1 Specifies item 1 to be shown on the display.
From the table below, select the items to be shown on the display.
Selection
Description
Display HART
None None Does not display items (item 1 is not selectable).
Displays the flow rate for the span of the PV-
Flow rate(%) Flow rate(%)
mapped process value of Subsection 4.1.2.
Displays the PV-mapped process value of
PV*2 PV
Subsection 4.1.2.
Velocity*2 Velocity Displays the flow velocity.
Volume flow Volume flow Displays the volumetric flow rate.
Mass flow Mass flow Displays the mass flow rate.
Displays the flow rate for the span of the PV-
Flow rate(%Bar) Flow rate(%Bar) mapped process value of Subsection 4.1.2 by using
a bar graph.
Displays the calorie.
Calorie Calorie
Totalizer 1*1 Totalizer1 Displays the totalized value of totalizer 1.
Tag number Tag number Displays the tag number.
Long tag Long tag Displays the long tag.
Commun protocol Commun Protocol Displays the communication protocol.
Displays the adhesion level of the electrode
Adhesion Adhesion
adhesion detecting function.
Analog out 1 Analog out1 Displays the current value of analog output 1
Displays the current value of analog output 2
Analog out 2 Analog out2
Displays the noise level of the flow noise diagnosis
Flow noise level Flow noise level function.
Totalizer 1 count*1*3 Totalizer1 count Displays the count value of totalizer 1.
*1: The upper/lower limits of the totalized value on the display are limited by the number of digits that can be displayed
according to the settings of the decimal point position.
“For example, if the decimal point position of totalizer 3 is set to decimal point 2, the upper and lower limits of totalizer 3
are +999999.99 and -999999.99.
For details about decimal-point position setting, refer to Subsection 4.9.3.
The upper and lower limits of the totalized count value are +99999999 and -99999999.”
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 122
When the totalized value and the totalized count exceed the upper and lower limit values, the behavior of the displayed
value depends on the revision of Main soft rev (Main board revision / Main soft rev) and Ind soft rev (Indicator board
revision / Ind soft rev).
“For details about the operation of the totalizer, refer to Subsection 4.2.2.
If the totalized value is reset to 0, the totalized value on the display may be different from the totalized value in
Subsection 4.2.2.
This is because the number of digits that can be displayed is different for both values. When re-totalizing, use the reset/
preset function for the totalized value.”
*2: The behavior of the displayed value depends on the revision of Main soft rev (Main board revision / Main soft rev) and
Ind soft rev (Indicator board revision / Ind soft rev). For detail of the displayed value, refer to Subsection 4.1.3.
*3: Available for Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) R2.02.01 or later and Ind soft rev (Indicator board
4.9.3 Decimal-point Position Setting

The number of decimal places can be set to the automatic adjustment or fix mode for the PV-
mapped totalized value or process value of Subsection 4.1.2.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Disp format ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► Display format ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the decimal-point position for the PV-
Format PV Display format PV
Specifies the decimal-point position for the totalized
Format total 1 Display format total 1
value of totalizer 1.
From the table below, select the position of the decimal point.
Process variable
Selection
Description
Display HART
Automatically adjusts the number of digits after the
Auto Auto
decimal point with the PV-mapped process value.*1
0 digit 0 digit Fixes the number of decimal places to “0”.
Automatically adjusts the number of digits after
Auto 2* Auto 2* the decimal point with the span of the PV-mapped
process value.*2
*: Available for Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) R2.02.01 or later and Ind soft rev (Indicator board
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 123
Totalized value
Selection
Description
Display HART
Automatically adjusts the number of digits after the
Auto Auto
decimal point with a totalized value.
*1: When “Auto” is selected, the display format is automatically switched in response to the process value selected for PV.
The table below shows details.
Judgment range Supported display format
|process value|≥ 100000 0digit
100000 >|process value|≥ 10000.0 1digit
10000.0 >|process value|≥ 1000.00 2digit
Since the display format is switched in response to the process values, the display format may be
switched when the product is used near the threshold listed in the above table.
*2: When “Auto 2” is selected, the display format is automatically switched in response to the span value of the process
selected for PV.
The table below shows details.
Judgment range Supported display format
|span value|> 900 0digit
900 ≥|span value|> 90 1digit
Since the display format is switched in response to span values of the process, the display format
is not changed as long as the span is not changed.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 124
4.9.4 Display Line Count and Scroll Settings

This product can show up to eight items on the display by scrolling, with four lines max. shown
at a time. The scroll method can be selected from the automatic display switching or the display
switching using the IR switch.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► Display operation configuration ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the number of lines to be shown on the
Line mode Display line
display.*1
Scroll mode Display scroll Specifies the display scroll method.*2
*1: From the table below, select the number of display lines.
The font size is automatically adjusted depending on the number of the displayed line.
Selection
Description
Display HART
1 line(big) 1 Line(Big) 1-line display without unit.
The numeric value is displayed in a large font.
1 line 1 Line 1-line display with unit.
2 line 2 Line 2-line display with units
3 line 3 Line 3-line display with units
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 125
Selection
Description
Display HART
4 line 4 Line 4-line display with units.
*2: From the table below, select the scroll method.

Selection
Description
Display HART
Off Off Does not scroll.
Manual Manual Specifies to the scroll using the IR switch.
Specifies to the automatic scroll at 2-second
Auto(2 s) Auto(2s)
intervals.
Auto(4 s) Auto(4s)
intervals.
Auto(8 s) Auto(8s)
intervals.
NOTE
The default value of the scroll method (Display scroll/Scroll mode) is “Off”.
If the value of the scroll method is set to “Off”, the 5th line and beyond cannot be checked on the
display.
To display the 5th line and beyond, set an option other than “Off”.
NOTE
When Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) is R2.01.01 or earlier, the default value of
the scroll method (Display scroll/Scroll mode) is “Manual”.
If the value of the scroll method is set to “Manual”, the display line is scrolled each time the
infrared switch [INC] reacts.
4.9.5 Trend Graph Setting

The trend graph display function displays the time change of the selected item as a trend graph.
Up to four items can be selected for a trend graph. A trend graph is scaled automatically, and the
time axis flows from the left to the right.
01 : 00
PRV Process value
01/01
01:00 Display start time
01/01
01:01 Display end time
SET SFT INC
F0432.ai
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 126
(1) Trend graph display setting
The process value and low limit value/high limit value that can be shown in a trend graph are as
follows:
Process value Display Low limit High limit
Flow rate (%) FLP 0% 100%
PV PRV 0 Span value specified in
Flow velocity VEL Subsection 4.1.5
Volumetric flow rate VFL
Mass flow rate MFL
Calorie* CAL
Analog output 1 AO1 4 mA 20 mA
Analog output 2* AO2
Totalizer 1 TL1 Preset value specified in Target value of the totalizer
Totalizer 2 TL2 Subsection 4.2.7 specified in Subsection 4.2.3
Totalizer 3 TL3
A trend graph can be set with the following parameters.

Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ► Display mode
HART
measure mode
From the table below, select the trend graph display.

Selection
Description
Display HART
Normal Normal Does not display a trend graph (normal display).
Trend Trend Displays a trend graph.
NOTE
The trend graph display function is not synchronized with the multi range and the forward/reverse
range.
(2) Trend graph display item setting

Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Trend select ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► Trend select ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Trend 1 Trend select 1 Specifies item 1 to be shown in a trend graph.
From the table below, select the display item of trend graph.
Selection
Description
Display HART
None None Does not set any items (item 1 is not selectable).
Specifies the flow rate for the span of the PV-
Flow rate(%) Flow rate(%)
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 127
Selection
Description
Display HART
Specifies the PV-mapped process value of
PV PV
Subsection 4.1.2.
Velocity Velocity Specifies the display item to the flow velocity.
Volume flow Volume flow Specifies the display item to the volumetric flow rate.
Mass flow Mass flow Specifies the display item to the mass flow rate.
Specifies the display item to calorie.
Calorie Calorie
Analog out 1 Analog out1 Specifies to the low limit of analog output 1.
Specifies to the low limit of analog output 2.
Analog out 2 Analog out2
Totalizer 1 Totalizer1 Specifies the totalized value of totalizer 1.
(3) Trend graph high/low limit setting

Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► Display operation configuration ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Trend offln URV Trend offline urv Specifies the high limit to display in a trend graph.
Trend offln LRV Trend offline lrv Specifies the low limit to display in a trend graph.
4.9.6 Update Period Setting

The update period of the process value and the trend graph on the display can be set.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ► Period
HART
period
From the table below, select the update period.

Selection
Description
Display HART
0.2 s 0.2s Sets the update period to 0.2 sec.
0.4 s 0.4s Sets the update period to 0.4 sec.
1.0 s 1.0s Sets the update period to 1 sec.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 128
4.9.7 Other Settings

(1) Display contrast setting
The contrast of the display can be adjusted to 11 levels (+5 to -5).
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ► Contrast
HART
contrast
+5 +4 +3 +2 +1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5
High Low
(2) Display damping time constant setting

This function can specify the damping time constant for the display independently of that
specified in Subsection 4.1.6.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ► Damp
HART
damping
NOTE
The damping time constant of the display is effective only for the display. Refer to Subsection
4.1.6 to specify the damping time constant for the output of the physical quantity.
(3) Date display format setting

The date display format can be set.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ► Format date
HART
format date
From the table below, specify the date display format.

Selection
Description
Display HART
MM/DD/YYYY MM/DD/YYYY Displays the date as “month/day/year”.
DD/MM/YYYY DD/MM/YYYY Displays the date as “day/month/year”.
YYYY/MM/DD YYYY/MM/DD Displays the date as “year/month/day”.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 129
(4) Display black/white inverse setting
The black/white inverse is available for the display.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Display set ► Optional config ► Inversion
HART
inversion
From the table below, select the display black/white inverse mode.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Does not set the display to the black/white inverse
Normal Normal mode.
(Character color: Black, Background color: White)
Sets the display to the black/white inverse mode.
Invert Invert
(Character color: White, Background color: Black)
(5) Display squawk setting (squawk)

The back light of the display can be blinked (squawked) at 4-second intervals to identify a
communicating product if a number of the same model is installed.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Disp indicator ► Squawk
HART Maintenance root menu ► Display indication► Squawk
From the table below, select whether or not to blink the display.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Off Off Does not blink the display.
On On Blinks the display (continuously).
Squawk once Squawk Once Blinks the display (only once).
(6) IR switch function

The IR switch function is a function to drive the IR switch for display operation. For the basic
operations of the IR switch, refer to Subsection 2.2.1.
Menu path
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► Display operation configuration ► IRSW
HART
operation
From the table below, select how the IR switch function is to be used.
Disable Disables the IR switch function.
Enable Enables the IR switch function.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 130
NOTE
If the IR switch function is set to “Disable”, the switch function is not displayed on the display, and
the IR switch cannot be operated.
00 : 00 00 : 00
0.00000m/s VEL
0.00000m/s VEL
0.0% FLP 0.0% FLP
22.000mA AO1 22.000mA AO1

SET SFT INC
F0447.ai F0448.ai
If “Enable” If “Disable”
(7) Time Display Settings

The item for time shown on the display can be set.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup► Display set ► Optional config ► Time display
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Display ► Display operation configuration ► Display time
From the table below, select the display time.

Selection
Description
Display HART
Current time Current time Displays Current time
Operation days Operation days Displays Operation days
Off Off Hidden
NOTE
“Current time” displays “Current time”, the parameter of date and time information. For details
about the date and time information, refer to Subsection 4.10.4.
“Operation days” displays only the day (ddddd) out of the parameter “Operation time”. For details
about the operation time, refer to Subsection 4.10.5.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 131
4.9.8 microSD Card Setting

If the optional code MC is selected, the backup parameters and logging data can be used by
inserting the dedicated microSD card into the display.
For details about backing up parameters and logging data, refer to Section 4.13.
(1) Removing the microSD card
IMPORTANT
If the microSD card is removed without executing “Unmount” on the software, it may cause data
stored on the microSD card to be erased or the device to operate abnormally.
The microSD card can be removed with the following parameters.

Menu path
Display Device setup ► microSD ► Unmount
From the table below, select whether to remove the microSD card.
Cancel Cancels the removal of the microSD card.
Execute Makes it possible to remove the microSD card in safety.
(2) microSD card format
IMPORTANT
If the format function of this product is not used to format a microSD card, it may cause a device
operation failure.
Formatting is possible with the following parameters.

Menu path
Display Device setup ► microSD ► Format
From the table below, select whether to format the microSD card.
Cancel Cancels formatting.
Execute Executes formatting.
(3) Checking microSD contents

Data on the microSD card can be checked with the following parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► microSD ► Contents
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 132
(4) Checking the property of microSD Card
The total space, available space and file system of the microSD card can be checked with the
following parameters.
Total space
Menu path
Display Device setup ► microSD ► Property ► Total space
Displaying available space

Menu path
Display Device setup ► microSD ► Property ► Available space
Displaying file system

Menu path
Display Device setup ► microSD ► Property ► File system
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 133
4.10 Device Information

4.10.1 Order Information
Order information can be specified for this product. If a particular parameter is specified at the
time of order, this product is shipped with the parameter specified. If a parameter is not specified
at the time of order, that parameter needs to be set by the customer.
The model and suffix code are indicated in the following format.
Sensor:
AXG □□□ - □□□□□□□□□□□□□□ - □□□□□ / □
(1) (2) (3)
AXW □□□ - □□□□□□□□□□□□□□ - □□□□□ / □

(1) (2) (3)
Transmitter:
AXG □ A - □□□□□□□□□□□ / □
(1) (2) (3)
AXW □ A - □□□□□□□□□□□ / □
(1) (2) (3)
(1) Model code, (2) Suffix code, (3) Optional code

Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ► Order info ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the Tag No. Max. 8 characters.
Tag No Tag
(Refer to Section 3.3.)
Specifies long tag. Max. 8 characters.
Long tag Long tag
(Refer to Section 3.3.)
Specifies the model code of the integral
MS code ► Model code Basic model code
flowmeter or remote transmitter.
MS code ► Suffix config 1 Suffix config 1 Specifies the suffix code of the integral
MS code ► Suffix config 2 Suffix config 2 flowmeter or remote transmitter.
MS code ► Option 1 Option 1
MS code ► Option 2 Option 2 Specifies the optional code of the integral
MS code ► Option 3 Option 3 flowmeter or remote transmitter.
MS code ► Option 4 Option 4
Remote sensor basic model Specifies the model code of the remote
RS MS code ► Model code
code sensor.
RS MS code ► Suffix config 1 Remote sensor suffix config 1 Specifies the suffix code of the remote
RS MS code ► Suffix config 2 Remote sensor suffix config 2 sensor.
RS MS code ► Option 1 Remote sensor option 1
RS MS code ► Option 2 Remote sensor option 2 Specifies the optional code of the remote
RS MS code ► Option 3 Remote sensor option 3 sensor.
RS MS code ► Option 4 Remote sensor option 4
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 134
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ► Ver/Num info ► (see below)
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Device information ► Version/Number information ►
HART
(see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Displays the serial number (device No.) of the
Trans serial No Transmitter serial No
transmitter.
Displays the serial number (device No.) of the
Sensor serial No Sensor serial No
sensor.
NOTE
When any parameters related to the order information about the product are changed, the order
information upon shipment from the manufacturing factory cannot be referred to.
To store the order information defined upon shipment from the manufacturing factory, it is
recommended to refer to Section 4.13 to make a backup.
4.10.2 Device Revision

The revision of the software used for this product can be checked.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ► Ver/Num info ► (see below)
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Device information ► Version/Number information ►
HART
(see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Transmitter type Transmitter type Displays the type of the transmitter.
Option board ID Option board ID Displays the type of the option board.
Main soft rev Main board revision Displays the software revision of the main board.
Snsr soft rev Sensor board revision Displays the software revision of the sensor board.
Ind soft rev Indicator board revision Displays the software revision of the display board.
Hard rev Hardware rev Displays the hardware revision of the HART device.
Dev id Dev id Displays the HART device ID.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 135
4.10.3 Memo Function

Three parameters can be used for the memo function. The memo function can be set to up to 16
characters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ► Memo ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Device information ► Memo ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Memo 1 Memo 1 Specifies memo 1.
4.10.4 Date and Time Information

The present date and time can be set. The display format for date and time is the format set in
Subsection 4.9.7.
This setting can be displayed and configured with the following parameters.
Displaying date and time

Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ► Date/Time ► (see below)
HART Maintenance root menu ► Time stamp ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Current date Current Date Displays current date.
Current time Current Time Displays current time.
Setting date and time

Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ► Date/Time ► (see below)
HART Maintenance root menu ► Time stamp ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Set date - Sets the current date.
Set time - Sets the current time.
- Set Date/Time Sets the current date/time.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 136
4.10.5 Display Operation Time

Displays operation time. Operation time refers to the operation time up to the present from the
time when the power was turned on for the first time. However, time is not counted when power is
not turned on.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ► Date/Time ► Operation time
HART Maintenance root menu ► Time stamp ► Operation time
The operation time is displayed in the format of “dddddD hh:mm”. “dddddD” indicates the day,
“hh” indicates the hour, and “mm” indicates the minute.
Example:
“00031D 12:34”
This example shows that the product has been operated for 31 days, 12 hours, and 34 minutes.
4.10.6 Explosion Protection Setting

Whether the product is a standard product or an explosion protection product can be set.
When using an explosion protection sensor, set the following parameter to “Yes”.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ► Order info ► Explosion protection
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Device information ► Order information ►
HART
Explosion protection
From the table below, select explosion protection setting.

Selection
Description
Display HART
No No No explosion protection setting.
Yes Yes Explosion protection.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 137
4.11 Self-diagnostic Function

4.11.1 Types of Diagnosis Functions
This product has a self-diagnostic function for diagnosing device failures or process states.
Diagnostic functions of this product are as follows:
Diagnosis function Description
Displays an alarm when the specified value is exceeded and outputs it as the
Alarm high/low limit function
status output.
Diagnoses an electrode adhesion from the resistance value of the electrode,
Electrode adhesion detection
and displays a warning or alarm if adhesion is detected.
Checks whether the sensor is in the empty pipe state, and displays an alarm
Sensor empty check
if the empty pipe state is detected.
Checks whether the transmitter signal line and the excitation line are
Misconnection detection
correctly connected, and displays a warning if a misconnection is detected.
Verification (device health
Diagnoses the health of the product, and displays its result.
diagnosis) function
Diagnoses deterioration of insulation from a resistance value of the
Electrode insulation deterioration
electrode, and displays a warning if it is detected.
diagnosis
Measures a flow noise detected in the sensor, and displays a warning if the
Flow noise diagnosis measured value exceeds the specified value.
Obtains the conductivity from the resistance value and size of the electrode,
Low conductivity diagnosis and displays a warning if the conductivity falls below the specified value.
Diagnoses the current value of exciting current, and displays warning if
Coil insulation diagnosis
insulation is detected.
4.11.2 Alarm High/Low Limit Function

The high/low limit function of the alarm displays an alarm when the PV-mapped physical
quantity of Subsection 4.1.2 exceeds the specified value. This function also can output an alarm
occurrence as a status output.
For details about the status output, refer to Subsection 4.3.9.
As a value to judge an alarm, the following four values can be set: high limit, high-high limit, low
limit, and low-low limit.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► H/L alarm cfg ► (see below)
HART Maintenance root menu ► High/Low alarm configuration ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
High alarm High alarm Specifies the high limit to judge an alarm.
Low alarm Low alarm Specifies the low limit to judge an alarm.
HH alarm High high alarm Specifies the high-high limit to judge an alarm.
LL alarm Low low alarm Specifies the low-low limit to judge an alarm.
When the high and low limit alarms are reset, each has a hysteresis. The hysteresis width should
be set with the percentage (%) for the span of the PV-mapped physical quantity of Subsection
4.1.2. The hysteresis in each case can be specified with the following parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► H/L alarm cfg ► H/L alarm hyst
HART Maintenance root menu ► High/Low alarm configuration ► Hi/Lo alarm hysteresis
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 138
NOTE
The alarm “052:H/L HH/LL alm” is masked at the factory shipment. When using this function, be
sure to set the alarm notification mask to “Off”. For details about the alarm mask function, refer to
Subsection 4.8.5.
The alarm high/low limit function can be configured with the following procedure.
(1) Specify the high limit, high-high limit, low limit or low-low limit to judge an alarm.
(2) Specify the hysteresis when alarms are reset.
(3) Refer to Subsection 4.3.9 to specify the status output function to H/L alarm or HH/LL alarm,
if the status output is used for alarm notification.
Example:
Span of volumetric flow rate = 300 m3/h,
High-high limit = 300 m3/h, Low-low limit = 25 m3/h,
High limit value = 250 m3/h, Low limit value = 50 m3/h,
When set to Hysteresis width = 5 %
(1) Hysteresis value = Span or max. range x Hysteresis width [%]

= 300 [m3/h] × 5 [%] = 15 [m3/h]
(2-1) Value that causes a high-high limit alarm to be reset
= Specified high-high limit value - Hysteresis value
= 285 [m3/h] (= 300 [m3/h] – 15 [m3/h])
(2-2) Value that causes a high limit alarm to be reset
= Specified high limit value - Hysteresis value
= 235 [m3/h] (= 250 [m3/h] – 15 [m3/h])
(3-1) Value that causes a low limit alarm to be reset
= Specified low limit value + Hysteresis value
= 65 [m3/h] (= 50 [m3/h] + 15 [m3/h])
(3-2) Value that causes a low-low limit alarm to be reset
= Specified low-low limit value + Hysteresis value
= 40 [m3/h] (= 25 [m3/h] + 15 [m3/h])
Flow rate[m3/h]
Hysteresis
High-High 300
Limit 285
High Limit 250
235
65
Low Limit 50
40
Low-Low 25
Limit
Time
Status Output
(High/Low limit)
Status Output
(High-High/
Low-Low limit) F0433.ai
NOTE
When the physical quantity to be output is changed, specify the alarm judgment value again.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 139
4.11.3 Electrode Adhesion Detection

The electrode adhesion detecting function diagnoses an electrode adhesion with the resistance
value of the electrode, and displays a warning or alarm if an adhesion is detected.
The electrode adhesion detection is displayed on the display in four levels: level 1 to level 4.
A value to judge each level can be specified individually. Display a warning when adhesion
exceeds level 3, and an alarm when adhesion exceeds level 4.
For details about the alarm and warning, refer to Subsection 4.8.1.
Alarm
Warning
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

F0434.ai
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ► Adhesion ► (see below)
HART Diagnostic rootmenu ► Diagnosis ► Adhesion ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the use of the electrode adhesion
Function Adhesion function
detecting function.*1
Threshold level 1 Adhesion level 1 Specifies the value to judge level 1.
Result ► Value Result ► Adhesion value Displays the resistance value of the electrode.
Result ► Status Result ► Adhesion status Displays the electrode adhesion detection level.
Specifies the data update cycle for electrode
Check cycle Adhesion check cycle
adhesion detection.
*1: From the table below, select the use of the electrode adhesion detection function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Does not use the electrode adhesion detecting
Disable Disable
function.
Enable Enable Uses the electrode adhesion detecting function.
NOTE
If the electrode adhesion detecting function is not used, the electrode resistance value and level
are cleared.
NOTE
Be sure to use the electrode adhesion detecting function when the sensor is in the full pipe state.
If the sensor is in the empty pipe state, the function to detect adhesion may not run normally.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 140
NOTE
The electrode adhesion detecting function restricts fluid conductivity. The recommended
conductivities are as follows.
Size Conductivity
2.5 to 10 mm 30 μS/cm or larger
15 to 400 mm (0.5 to 16 in.) 10 μS/cm or larger
500 mm 20 μS/cm or larger
NOTE
If the data update cycle for the adhesion detection is shortened, the error of the electrode
resistance value increases. Do not change the default value unless especially specified.
4.11.4 Sensor Empty Check

The sensor empty check function checks whether the sensor is in the empty pipe state, and
displays an alarm if the empty pipe state is detected.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ► Empty check ► (see below)
HART Diagnostic root menu ► Diagnosis ► Empty ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Display the result of the sensor empty check
Empty status Result ► Empty status
function.*1
Electrode voltage A Electrode voltage A Displays the voltage of electrode A.
Electrode voltage B Electrode voltage B Displays the voltage of electrode B.
*1: From the table below, check the result of the sensor empty check function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Full Full Indicates that the sensor is in the full pipe state.
Empty Empty Indicates that the sensor is in the empty pipe state.
IMPORTANT
• If the sensor is in the empty pipe state, output fluctuation or empty check alarm may occur.
Be sure to use this product being filled with liquid fully.
• The empty check is determined by measuring the resistance between the electrode and the
ground.For that reason, the empty pipe state may not be detected due to the piping condition,
electrode condition, and environmental noise. In particular, note that the empty check function
may not operate properly for high-viscosity fluids and adhesive fluids.
• It takes 10 to 15 minutes to diagnose the empty pipe state.Other process alarms may occur
before the empty check alarm occurs after the pipe is in the empty pipe state.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 141
4.11.5 Wiring Connection Diagnosis

The wiring connection diagnostic function diagnoses whether the signal line and the excitation
line between the remote type sensor and transmitter are correctly connected, and displays a
warning if a misconnection is detected.
For example, if there are two sets (A and B) of remote sensors and remote transmitters, this
function checks whether the signal line of transmitter A is misconnected to the signal terminal
of sensor B, or the excitation line of transmitter A is misconnected to the excitation terminal of
sensor B.
It takes approximately 10 seconds to diagnose the wiring connection.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ► (see below)
HART Diagnostic root menu ► Diagnosis ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the use of the wiring connection diagnostic
Diagnostic execute Diagnostic Exe
function.*1
Specifies the output to use the wiring connection
Diagnostic output Diagnostic output
diagnostic function.*2
*1: From the table below, select the use of the wiring connection diagnostic function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Connect check exe Connection check execute Starts the wiring connection diagnostic function.
*2: From the table below, select the output for which the wiring connection diagnostic function is executed.
Selection Frequency
Analog output Totalizer Pulse output
Display HART output
Input 0
Zero Zero 0% output 0 pps 0% output
(Output fixed)
Output of Totalization of Output of Output of
Measured value Measured value calculated value calculated value calculated value calculated value
(Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined)
Fixes the last Totalizes the Fixes the last Fixes the last
valid value last valid value valid value valid value
Hold Hold
before the before the before the before the
diagnosis starts. diagnosis starts. diagnosis starts. diagnosis starts.
IMPORTANT
• Before using the wiring connection diagnostic function, be sure to disconnect this product
from the control loop.
• When the wiring misconnection diagnostic function is used, the analog output and pulse
output are not output correctly.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 142
NOTE
When using the wiring connection diagnostic function, the following conditions must be satisfied.
If the conditions are not satisfied, this product may not correctly diagnose the wiring connection
state.
• The sensor is in the full pipe state.
• No influence of noise.
• The magnetic flowmeter transmitter and AM012 (calibrator) are not connected.
4.11.6 Verification (Device Health Diagnosis) Function

The verification function diagnoses the health of the product and displays the diagnosis result. It
takes about 15 minutes to complete the verification function, and the progress of the verification
function can be checked via the bar graph and the remaining time on the display.
01 : 00
Verification execution
Excitation circuit...
10:00
SET SFT INC
This function can inspect conditions of the magnetic circuit, excitation circuit and calculation
circuit, and executes the device health diagnosis of the product based on their internal alarm
record along with their wiring misconnection. This function evaluates the diagnosis result based
on the conditions of the product and shows “Passed” if no problem is found or “Failed” if a
problem is found on the display.
The following execution results are shown on the display.
• Examples of “Passed” results
VF check results Passed
VF Operation time 00001D 10:01
Magnetic circuit result Passed
Exciting circuit result Passed
Calculation circuit result Passed
Device status result Passed
Connection status result Passed
• Examples of “Failed” results

VF check results Failed
VF Operation time 00001D 10:01
Magnetic circuit result Passed
Exciting circuit result Passed
Calculation circuit result Failed
Device status result Passed
Connection status result Passed
Contact Yokogawa service center if the “Failed” message is displayed for items from “Magnetic
circuit result” to “Device status result”.
If “Failed” is displayed for “Connection status result”, check for wiring misconnection between the
sensor and transmitter (refer to Subsection 4.11.5 for detail) and damage on the cables.
The verification function can be used in two ways depending on the state of the fluid; one state
where a fluid is flowing and another state where no fluid is flowing.
The two diagnosis results (current and previous) are stored in the device memory, and they can
be checked later.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 143
If the verification function is used, the following results can be displayed.
Total judgment result Calculation circuit diagnosis result
Device operation time at the start of verification execution Device alarm diagnosis result
Magnetic circuit diagnosis result Wiring connection diagnosis result
Excitation circuit diagnosis result

Menu path
HART Maintenance root menu ► Verification ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the output to execute the verification
function.*1
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Verification ► (see below)
HART Maintenance root menu ► Verification ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the fluid state when performing the
Mode VF mode
verification function.*2
Execute Verification Exe Specifies the execution of the verification function.*3
VF No VF No Specifies the diagnosis result display time.*4
VF target select* VF target select* Specifies the target for diagnosis*5
Displays the diagnosis result of the time set by the
Result Result
VF number.*6
*1: From the table below, select the output to execute the verification function.
Selection Frequency
Display HART output
Input 0
(Output fixed)
Hold Hold
*2: From the table below, select the fluid status required to execute the verification function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Executes the verification function with the fluid not
No flow No flow
flowing.
Executes the verification function with the fluid
Flow Flow
flowing.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 144
*3: From the table below, select whether or not to execute the verification function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Not execute Not execute Does not execute the verification function.
Execute Execute Executes the verification function.
*4: From the table below, select the execution result of the verification function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Displays the result obtained upon shipment from the
Factory Factory
manufacturing factory.
Previous Previous Displays the previous result.
Present Present Displays the result at this time.
*5: From the table below, select the target for diagnosis.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Magnetic circuit Magnetic Magnetic circuit diagnosis
Excite circuit Excitation Excitation circuit diagnosis
Calc circuit Calculation Calculation circuit diagnosis
Device status Device status Device alarm diagnosis
Connect status Conn status Wiring misconnection check
In the default state, all of the diagnosis results are reflected in the final results of the verification.
Even if an item is set on VF target select so as not to reflect the diagnosis results to the final
results of the verification, execution time for the verification does not change because the
diagnosis itself is executed. In addition, the diagnosis results selected to “0” with VF target select
are displayed as “Skip”.
Note that verification itself cannot be executed if all diagnoses are unchecked on VF target select
(0x0000).
*6: From the table below, select the result.
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Failed/Passed VF check result Execution result *7
The time at the start of verification execution
VF operate time VF operation time
(displays the device operation time at that time)
Magnetic circuit Magnetic circuit result Magnetic circuit diagnosis result *7
Excite circuit Excitation circuit result Excitation circuit diagnosis result *7
Calc circuit Calculation circuit result Calculation circuit diagnosis result *7
Device status VF device status result Device alarm diagnosis result *7
Connect status Connection status result Wiring misconnection check result *7
*7: From the table below, select the result of the verification function.
Result
Description
Display HART
There are no problems concerning the diagnosis
Passed Passed
result.
Failed Failed There is a problem concerning the diagnosis result.
Canceled Canceled Cancels the diagnosis.
No diagnosis result data (The verification function is
No data No Data
not used.)
Unknown Unknown Cannot perform a diagnosis.
Skip Skip Out of verification target
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 145
IMPORTANT
• Before using the verification function, be sure to disconnect this product from the control loop.
• When the electrode insulation deterioration diagnosis function is used, the analog output and
pulse output are not output correctly.
• Note that parameters cannot be changed while the verification function is executed.
NOTE
• Be sure to use the verification function when the sensor is in the full pipe state. If the sensor is
in the empty pipe state, the function to detect adhesion may not run normally.
• When using the verification function, correctly specify the fluid status with the parameter.
• If there is a problem with the verification result, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 146
4.11.7 Electrode Insulation Deterioration Diagnosis

The electrode insulation deterioration diagnosis function diagnoses a deterioration of insulation
with a resistance value of the electrode and displays a warning if deterioration of insulation is
detected. It takes approximately 5 minutes to complete this diagnosis.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the execution of the electrode insulation
Diagnostic execute Diagnostic Exe
deterioration diagnostic function.*1
Specifies the output to execute the electrode
insulation deterioration diagnostic function.*2
*1: From the table below, select the use of the electrode insulation deterioration diagnostic function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Electronics insulation Starts the electrode insulation deterioration
Electrode insul exe
execute diagnosis function.
*2: From the table below, select the output while the electrode insulation deterioration diagnostic function is executed.
Selection Frequency
Display HART output
Input 0
(Output fixed)
Hold Hold
IMPORTANT
• Before using the electrode insulation deterioration diagnosis function, be sure to disconnect
this product from the control loop.
• When the electrode insulation deterioration diagnosis function is used, the analog output and
pulse output are not output correctly.
NOTE
Be sure to use the electrode insulation deterioration diagnostic function when the sensor is in
the full pipe state. If the sensor is in the empty pipe state, the electrode insulation deterioration
diagnosis function may not run normally.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 147
4.11.8 Flow Noise Diagnosis

This function measures a flow noise detected in the sensor, and displays a warning if it exceeds
the specified value.
The flow noise diagnosis is shown on the display in four levels: level 1 to level 4. A value to
judge each level can be specified individually. If an output exceeds the level 3 or level 4 value, a
warning message is displayed.
For details about the flow noise span and damping time constant, refer to Subsections 4.1.5 and
4.1.6.
Warning
Warning
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

F0436.ai

Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ► Flow noise ► (see below)
HART Diagnostic root menu ► Diagnosis ► Flow noise ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the use of the flow noise diagnosis
Function Flow noise function
function.*1
Threshold level 1 Flow noise level 1 Specifies the value to judge level 1.
Result ► Value Result ► Flow noise Displays the flow noise value.
Result ► Status Result ► Flow noise status Displays the flow noise level.
*1: From the table below, select the use of the flow noise function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Disable Disable Does not use the flow noise diagnosis function.
Enable Enable Uses the flow noise diagnosis function.
NOTE
If the flow noise diagnosis function is set to “Disable”, the flow noise value and level are cleared.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 148
4.11.9 Low Conductivity Diagnosis

The low conductivity diagnosis function calculates conductivity from the resistance value and size
of the electrode and displays a warning if the conductivity falls below the specified value.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Diagnosis ► Conductivity ► (see below)
HART Diagnostic root menu ► Diagnosis ► Conductivity ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Specifies the use of the low conductivity diagnosis
Function Low conductivity function
function.*1
Result ► Conductivity
Result ► Value Displays the calculated conductivity.
value
Specifies the value used to judge the low
Low limit Conductivity low limit
conductivity.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Device info ► Order info ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Electrode size Electrode size Displays the electrode size.
*1: From the table below, select the use of the low conductivity diagnosis function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Does not use the low conductivity diagnosis
Disable Disable
function.
Enable Enable Uses the low conductivity diagnosis function.
NOTE
The electrode size is specified upon shipment from the manufacturing factory.
When any parameters related to the order information about the product are changed, the order
information upon shipment from the manufacturing factory cannot be referred to.
To store the order information defined upon shipment from the manufacturing factory, it is
recommended to refer to Section 4.13 to make a backup.
NOTE
Before using the low conductivity diagnosis function, always make sure that the sensor is in the
full pipe state. If the sensor is in the empty pipe state or the transmitter is connected with AM012
(calibrator), the function to diagnose conductivity may not run normally.
NOTE
If this function is set to “Disable”, the low conductivity value is cleared.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 149
4.11.10 Coil Insulation Diagnosis

Coil Insulation Diagnosis is the function to display a warning when the insulation is deteriorated
by diagnosing the current value of the exciting current.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Displays the current value of Exciting current to
IEX compare IEX compare
judge coil insulation.
Coil insul threshold Coil insulation threshold Sets the value to judge coil insulation.
4.11.11 Other Setting

In addition, the maximum voltage values of the flow rate signal and coil resistance value are
displayed as diagnostic information.
Menu path
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Displays the maximum voltage of the flow signal.
V peak hold V peak hold value
IEX resistance IEX coil resistance Displays the coil resistance value.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 150
4.12 Test Mode

4.12.1 Test Mode Setting
If the test mode is executed, a process value or the value to be output from a connection terminal
can be arbitrarily set, and a response from the device can be tested.
A warning is displayed to indicate that the test mode is in use while this test mode is used.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Test ► (see below)
HART Maintenance root menu ► Test ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Input test ► Test mode Specifies the use of the test mode (input).
Test mode
Output test ► Test mode Specifies the use of the test mode (output).
From the table below, select the input/output and process value to test.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Velocity test Velocity test on Starts testing the flow velocity.
Volume test Volume flow test on Starts testing the volumetric flow rate.
Mass test Mass flow test on Starts testing the mass flow rate.
Starts testing the calorie.
Calorie test Calorific value test on
Starts testing the analog input.
AI test AI test on
SI3 test SI3 test on Starts testing status input.
AO1 test AO1 test on Starts testing analog output 1.
PO1 test Pulse1 test on Starts testing pulse output/frequency output 1.
SO1 test SO1 test on Starts testing status output 1.
Starts testing analog output 2.
AO2 test AO2 test on
PO2 test Pulse2 test on Starts testing pulse output/frequency output 2.
Example: To select an output test item on the display

AO1 test ► SHIFT key ► AO1 test
(Test item can be selected by pushing the SHIFT key)
A test mode value is transmitted in the order of the flow velocity, volumetric flow rate, mass flow
rate, and calorie. For example, if the volumetric flow rate is set as a test value, the mass flow rate
and calorie can be obtained from the test value. In this case, the test value of the flow velocity is
executed with the normal measurement value.
NOTE
To specify each terminal output, refer to Subsection 4.3.1. If the specified output is different from
the test starting output, the test mode cannot be used.
For example, if the pulse/status output is set as a frequency output to start the status output test,
the test cannot be started.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 151
4.12.2 Test Value Setting

It is necessary to set test values for the input and output and process value to test.
However, the unit of the process value to test is the same as the unit specified in Subsection
4.1.4. If the unit is changed, the process value is also changed to match to the changed unit.
Input test
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Input test ► (see below)
HART Maintenance root menu ► Test ► Input test ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Velocity Velocity Specifies the flow velocity.
Volume Volume flow Specifies the volumetric flow rate.
Mass Mass flow Specifies the mass flow rate.
Specifies the calorie.
Calorie Calorific value
Specifies to the current value of analog input.
AI AI
SI3 SI3 Specifies the state of status input.
Output test
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Output test ► (see below)
HART Maintenance root menu ► Test ► Output test ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
AO1 AO1 Specifies to the current value of analog output 1.
Specifies the frequency of pulse output/frequency
PO1 Pulse1
output 1.
SO1 SO1 Specifies the state of status output 1.
Specifies to the current value of analog output 2.
AO2 AO2
Specifies the frequency of pulse output/frequency
PO2 Pulse2
output 2.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 152
4.12.3 Test 2 Mode

The test 2 mode is the function to collectively test a process value, analog output, totalized value,
and pulse.
The test value can be set in the range between -10.0% and 110.0%.
Input test values (%) are tested with a scale value in response to the span of each process value.
Test 2 mode setting

Selects whether to enable test 2 mode.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Test 2 mode
HART Maintenance root menu ► Test ► Test 2 mode
Selection
Display HART
Normal Normal
Test Test
Test 2 mode value setting

Test 2 mode value is set with the percentage (%) for the span.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Test 2 value
HART Maintenance root menu ► Test ► Test 2 output value
4.12.4 Test Mode Auto Reset

When a specific time lapses with no parameters changed after the test mode is enabled, the
test mode will be reset automatically. When any test mode parameter is changed, the test mode
release time is extended.
The time to automatically reset the test mode can be configured with the following parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Test ► Release time
HART Maintenance root menu ► Test ► Release time
From the table below, select the test mode auto release time.
Selection
Description
Display HART
10 min 10 min Specifies the release time to 10 min.
30 min 30 min Specifies the release time to 30 min.
1h 1h Specifies the release time to 1 hr.
3h 3h Specifies the release time to 3 hrs.
12 h 12 h Specifies the release time to 12 hrs.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 153
4.13 Event Management Function

4.13.1 Backup Function
The backup function can back up parameter settings in the display’s built-in memory (display
board) or microSD card (with the optional code MC selected). If the backup data is restored, the
parameter settings can be duplicated to another device. The display’s built-in memory can store
the data for three backups and the microSD card can store as much data as the capacity allows.
There are three backup methods available: backup from the main board of the product to the
memory on the display board, backup from the main board of the product to the microSD card,
and backup from the memory on the display board to the microSD card. The file name, backup
name, and date can be specified using the backup function.
The data backed up to the microSD card is stored in the “YOKOGAWA” folder as a “.PAR” file.

For details about the backup parameters, refer to Subsection 4.13.3.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Param bkup/restore ► (see below)
HART Maintenance root menu ► Param bkup/restore ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Displays the backup name defined upon shipment
F backup name Factory backup name
from the manufacturing factory.
Displays the backup date upon shipment from the
F backup date Factory backup date
manufacturing factory.
Specifies the name of the file to be backed up to the
SD backup name SD backup name
microSD card.
Specifies backup name 1.
Backup name 1 Backup name 1
Up to 16 characters
Backup date 1 Backup date 1 Specifies date 1.
Up to 16 characters
Up to 16 characters
Backup execute Backup Exe Specifies the use of the backup function.*1
Displays the backup result.*2
Backup result* — Displays results in the method for HART
communication.
NOTE
When backup execute is completed, the setting value for backup execute returns to
“Not execute”. The execution results can be confirmed with the parameter of the display,
“Backup result”.
*1: From the table below, select how the backup function is to be used.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Not execute Not Execute Does not back up data.
Backs up parameter settings from the main board to
Store main to 1 Store Main to 1
memory 1 in the display’s built-in memory.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 154
Selection
Description
Display HART
Store main to SD Store Main to SD
the microSD card.
Backs up parameter settings from memory 1 in the
Store EEP1 to SD Store EEP1 to SD
display’s built-in memory to the microSD card.
*2: The result of the backup function is displayed as shown below.

Selection
Description
Display HART
Unexecuted Unexecuted Backup not executed.
Success Success Backup successful.
Failure Failure Backup failed.
Running Running Parameter backup running.
The table below shows alarms whose parameters can be backed up when an alarm occurs.
: Executable when an alarm occurs.
―: Not executable when an alarm occurs.
Alarm name
Backup
Display HART
010:Main CPU FAIL 10 Main board CPU failure ―
011:Rev calc FAIL 11 Reverse calculation failure ―
012:Main EEP FAIL 12 Main board EEPROM failure ―
013:Main EEP dflt 13 Main board EEPROM default ―
014:Snsr bd FAIL 14 Sensor board failure 
015:Snsr comm ERR 15 Sensor communication error 
016:AD 1 FAIL[Sig] 16 A/D1 failure[Signal] 
017:AD 2 FAIL[Excit] 17 A/D2 failure[Exciter] 
018:Coil open 18 Coil open 
019:Coil short 19 Coil short 
020:Exciter FAIL 20 Exciter failure 
021:PWM 1 stop 21 PWM1 stop ―
023:Opt bd mismatch 23 Option board mismatch ―
024:Opt bd EEP FAIL 24 Option board EEPROM failure ―
025:Opt bd A/D FAIL 25 Option board A/D failure ―
026:Opt bd SPI FAIL 26 Option board SPI failure ―
027:Restore FAIL 27 Parameter restore incomplete 
028:Ind bd FAIL 28 Indicator board failure ―
029:Ind bd EEP FAIL 29 Indicator board EEPROM failure ―
030:LCD drv FAIL 30 LCD driver failure ―
031:Ind bd mismatch 31 Indicator board mismatch ―
032:Ind comm ERR 32 Indicator communication error ―
033:microSD FAIL 33 microSD failure ―
050:Signal overflow 50 Signal overflow 
051:Empty detect 51 Empty pipe detection 
052:H/L HH/LL alm 52 H/L or HH/LL alarm 
053:Adh over lv 4 53 Adhesion over level 4 
060:Span cfg ERR 60 Span configuration error ―
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 155
Alarm name
Backup
Display HART
061:PV F cfg ERR 61 PV flow select configuration error ―
062:AO 1 4-20 lmt 62 Analog output 1 4-20mA limit error ―
063:AO 2 4-20 lmt 63 Analog output 2 4-20 mA limit error ―
064:AO 1 mlt rng 64 Analog output 1 multi range error ―
065:H/L cfg ERR 65 H/L HH/LL configuration error ―
066:Density cfg ERR 66 Density configuration error ―
067:Pls 1 cfg ERR 67 Pulse output 1 configuration error ―
069:Nomi size cfg 69 Nominal size configuration error ―
070:Adh cfg ERR 70 Adhesion configuration error ―
071:FLN cfg ERR 71 Flow noise configuration error ―
072:Log not start 72 Data logging not started ―
080:AO 1 saturate 80 Analog output 1 saturated 
082:Pls 1 saturate 82 Pulse output 1 saturated 
084:AI saturate 84 Analog input saturated 
085:Cable miscon 85 Cable misconnect 
086:Coil insulation 86 Coil insulation warning 
131:Trans mismatch 131 Transmitter type mismatch ―
087:Adhesion lv 3 87 Adhesion over level 3 
088:LC warn 88 Low conductivity warning 
089:Insu detect 89 Insulation detection 
090:FLN over lv 3 90 Flow noise over level 3 
092:AZ warn 92 Autozero warning 
093:Verif warn 93 Verification warning 
094:Fact noise warn 94 Factory noise warning 
095:Simulate active 95 Simulation active 
096:AO 1 fix 96 Analog output 1 fixed 
098:Pls 1 fix 98 Pulse output 1 fixed 
100:AI fix 100 Analog input fixed 
101:Param restore run 101 Parameter restore running ―
102:Disp over 102 Display over warning ―
103:SD size warn 103 microSD card size warning ―
104:Bkup incmplt 104 Parameter backup incomplete 
105:SD mismatch 105 microSD card mismatch ―
106:SD removal ERR 106 microSD card removal procedure error ―
120:Watchdog 120 Watchdog 
121:Power off 121 Power off 
122:Inst power FAIL 122 Instant power failure 
123:Param bkup run 123 Parameter backup running ―
124:Data log run 124 Data logging running 
130:DevID not enter 130 Device ID not entered 
IMPORTANT
• Note that parameters cannot be changed when the backup function is executed. It takes
approximately 20 seconds to complete backup processing.
• Take care not to duplicate the file name when backing up data to the microSD card.
• Note that if the microSD card runs out of free space, the subsequent data will not be stored.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 156
NOTE
The backup name and date do not affect the backup function. Use this as the memo column
when performing the backup function.
4.13.2 Restore/Duplicate Parameter

If the restore function is used, it becomes possible to restore parameter settings, which are
backed up in the display’s built-in memory or microSD card (optional code MC), to the product.
In addition, it is possible to return parameters to default values defined when shipped from
the factory and to duplicate the backed-up parameters to other device based on the same
specifications.
IMPORTANT
• For the remote type, it is necessary to set the device information of the remote sensor to the
parameters of the remote transmitter.
• Before using the restore function, be sure to remove this product from piping line or stop the
line.
• After executing the restore function, check that backup data is set for the target parameter.
• When using the restore function to duplicate the backed-up parameters to other device,
be sure to re-set the values before duplication to the parameter “Low MF”, “High MF”,
“Trans serial No” and “Sensor serial No” after duplicating. If the parameter “Low MF” and
“High MF” are not re-set, the error will occur in the flow rate measurement.
The restore method can be selected from the following four types.
Duplicate Data Restores the target parameter (excluding the factory adjusted value of the transmitter)
from the product for which the parameter is backed up.
Restore is also executable for other products.
Restore Data Restores the target parameter (including the factory adjusted value of the transmitter)
from the product for which the parameter is backed up.
Restore is not executable for other products.
Compulsion Data Restores the target parameter (specified at factory shipping) from the product for which
the parameter is backed up.
Restore is also executable for other products.
Restore factory Restores all the parameters (specified upon shipment from the manufacturing factory).
When using the restore function, always make sure that the backed-up device information
matches the device information to be restored.
The table below shows the consistency of the device information.
: Items to be Matched.
Device Information Duplicate Data Restore Data Compulsion Data
Option Board ID   -
Transmitter Serial No -  -
Sensor Serial No -  -
Main Board Software Rev.   -
Sensor Board Software Rev.   -
Display Board Software Rev.   -
Model (Note)   -
Communication and I/O Code   -
NOTE
Data can only be duplicated or restored between products of the same model.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 157
For details about the restorable parameters, refer to Subsection 4.13.3.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Param bkup/restore ► (see below)
HART Maintenance root menu ► Param bkup/restore ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Restore execute Restore Exe Specifies the execution of the restore function.*1
Restore result — Displays the restore result.*2
NOTE
When restore execute is completed, the setting value for restore execute returns to
“Not execute”. The execution results can be confirmed with the parameter of the display,
“Restore result”.
*1: From the table below, select the execution of the restore function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Not execute Not Execute Does not restore data.
Restores the parameter (Duplicate Data) setting
Duplicate data 1 Duplicate Data1 from memory 1 on the display board to the main
board of the product.
Duplicate SD Duplicate SD from the microSD card to the main board of the
product.
Restores the parameter (Restore Data) setting from
Restore data 1 Restore Data1 memory 1 on the display board to the main board of
the product.
the product.
the product.
Restore SD Restore SD
the microSD card to the main board of the product.
Restores the parameter (Compulsion Data) setting
Compulsion data 1 Compulsion Data1 from memory 1 on the display board to the main
Compulsion SD Compulsion SD from the microSD card to the main board of the
product.
Restores to the status that is set upon shipment
Restore factory Restore Factory
from the manufacturing factory.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 158
*2: The result of the restore function is displayed as shown below.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Unexecuted Unexecuted Have not restored
Success Success Succeeded in restoration.
Failure Failure Failed in restoration.
Running Running Restore running
The table below shows alarms whose parameters can be restored or duplicated when an alarm
occurs.
: Executable when an alarm occurs.
―: Not executable when alarm occurs.
Alarm name
Restore
Display HART
010:Main CPU FAIL 10 Main board CPU failure ―
011:Rev calc FAIL 11 Reverse calculation failure ―
012:Main EEP FAIL 12 Main board EEPROM failure ―
013:Main EEP dflt 13 Main board EEPROM default ―
014:Snsr bd FAIL 14 Sensor board failure 
015:Snsr comm ERR 15 Sensor communication error 
016:AD 1 FAIL[Sig] 16 A/D1 failure[Signal] 
017:AD 2 FAIL[Excit] 17 A/D2 failure[Exciter] 
018:Coil open 18 Coil open 
019:Coil short 19 Coil short 
020:Exciter FAIL 20 Exciter failure 
023:Opt bd mismatch 23 Option board mismatch ―
024:Opt bd EEP FAIL 24 Option board EEPROM failure ―
025:Opt bd A/D FAIL 25 Option board A/D failure ―
026:Opt bd SPI FAIL 26 Option board SPI failure ―
027:Restore FAIL 27 Parameter restore incomplete 
028:Ind bd FAIL 28 Indicator board failure ―
029:Ind bd EEP FAIL 29 Indicator board EEPROM failure ―
030:LCD drv FAIL 30 LCD driver failure ―
031:Ind bd mismatch 31 Indicator board mismatch ―
032:Ind comm ERR 32 Indicator communication error ―
033:microSD FAIL 33 microSD failure ―
050:Signal overflow 50 Signal overflow 
051:Empty detect 51 Empty pipe detection 
052:H/L HH/LL alm 52 H/L or HH/LL alarm 
053:Adh over lv 4 53 Adhesion over level 4 
060:Span cfg ERR 60 Span configuration error ―
061:PV F cfg ERR 61 PV flow select configuration error ―
062:AO 1 4-20 lmt 62 Analog output 1 4-20mA limit error ―
063:AO 2 4-20 lmt 63 Analog output 2 4-20 mA limit error ―
064:AO 1 mlt rng 64 Analog output 1 multi range error ―
065:H/L cfg ERR 65 H/L HH/LL configuration error ―
066:Density cfg ERR 66 Density configuration error ―
069:Nomi size cfg 69 Nominal size configuration error ―
070:Adh cfg ERR 70 Adhesion configuration error ―
071:FLN cfg ERR 71 Flow noise configuration error ―
072:Log not start 72 Data logging not started ―
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 159
Alarm name
Restore
Display HART
084:AI saturate 84 Analog input saturated 
085:Cable miscon 85 Cable misconnect 
086:Coil insulation 86 Coil insulation warning 
131:Trans mismatch 131 Transmitter type mismatch ―
087:Adhesion lv 3 87 Adhesion over level 3 
088:LC warn 88 Low conductivity warning 
089:Insu detect 89 Insulation detection 
092:AZ warn 92 Autozero warning 
093:Verif warn 93 Verification warning 
094:Fact noise warn 94 Factory noise warning 
095:Simulate active 95 Simulation active 
100:AI fix 100 Analog input fixed 
101:Param restore run 101 Parameter restore running ―
102:Disp over 102 Display over warning ―
103:SD size warn 103 microSD card size warning ―
104:Bkup incmplt 104 Parameter backup incomplete 
105:SD mismatch 105 microSD card mismatch ―
106:SD removal ERR 106 microSD card removal procedure error ―
120:Watchdog 120 Watchdog 
121:Power off 121 Power off 
122:Inst power FAIL 122 Instant power failure 
123:Param bkup run 123 Parameter backup running ―
124:Data log run 124 Data logging running 
130:DevID not enter 130 Device ID not entered 
IMPORTANT
When using the restore function, be sure to prepare a backup file in the built-in memory or the
microSD card. Note that the restore function is not executable if a backup file is not provided.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 160
4.13.3 Backup and Restore Parameters

The list below shows the parameters that can be backed up or restored. However, the date to be
restored with “Compulsion Data” is the value(s) specified by the customer upon shipment from
the manufacturing factory. (Default value when not designated)
Parameter Restore or Duplicate
Duplicate Restore Compulsion Restore
Display HART
Data Data Data factory
Damp AO/F Velocity damping AO/frequency   ― 
Damp pls/ttl Velocity damping pulse/total   ― 
Damp AO/F Volume flow damping AO/frequency   ― 
Damp pls/ttl Volume flow damping pulse/total   ― 
Damp AO/F Mass flow damping AO/frequency   ― 
Damp pls/ttl Mass flow damping pulse/total   ― 
Calorific value damping AO/
Damp AO/F   ― 
frequency
Damp pls/ttl Calorific value damping pulse/total   ― 
Low MF Low MF    
High MF High MF    
Flow sensor sel Flow sensor select   ― 
Nominal size unit Nominal size unit    
Nominal size Nominal size    
PV flow select PV flow select    
Unit Velocity unit ― ―  
Unit Volume flow unit ― ―  
Unit Mass flow unit ― ―  
Time unit Time unit ― ―  
Span Velocity span    
Span Volume flow span    
Span Mass flow span    
Span Calorific flow span   ― 
Zero value Zero value   ― 
Conv factor Total1 conv factor ― ―  
Low cut Total1 low cut    
Failure opts Total1 fail opts   ― 
Options Total1 options   ― 
Start/Stop Total1 Start/Stop   ― 
Reset/Preset Total1 Reset/Preset   ― 
Preset value Total1 preset value   ― 
Set point Total1 set point   ― 
Low cut Total2 low cut   ― 
Low cut Total3 low cut   ― 
Output mode Pulse1 output mode    
Active mode Pulse1 active mode   ― 
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 161
Display HART
Fix width Pulse1 fix width   ― 
Rate unit Pulse1 rate unit ― ―  
Rate value Pulse1 rate value    
Low cut Pulse1 low cut    
Alarm out Pulse1 alarm out   ― 
Frequency at 0% Frequency1 at 0%    
Frequency at 100% Frequency1 at 100%    
SO1 function Status output1 function   ― 
Options Pulse1 option   ― 
Active pulse Pulse2 active pulse   ― 
Output mode Pulse2 output mode   ― 
Pulse select Pulse2 select   ― 
Active mode Pulse2 active mode   ― 
Fix width Pulse2 fix width   ― 
Rate value Pulse2 rate value   ― 
Low cut Pulse2 low cut   ― 
Alarm out Pulse2 alarm out   ― 
Frequency at 0% Frequency2 at 0%   ― 
Frequency at 100% Frequency2 at 100%   ― 
SO2 function Status output2 function   ― 
Options Pulse2 option   ― 
Active mode Status output3 active mode   ― 
Function Status output3 function   ― 
Active mode Status input3 active mode   ― 
Function Status input3 function   ― 
Forward span 2 Forward span 2   ― 
Reverse span 1 Reverse span 1   ― 
Reverse span 2 Reverse span 2   ― 
Auto range hyst Auto range hyst   ― 
Bi direction hyst Bi direction hyst   ― 
Low cut AO1 low cut   ― 
High limit AO1 high limit   ― 
Low limit AO1 low limit   ― 
Alarm out AO1 alarm out    
Range mode AO1 range mode   ― 
AO2 select AO2 select   ― 
Low cut AO2 low cut   ― 
High limit AO2 high limit   ― 
Low limit AO2 low limit   ― 
Alarm out AO2 alarm out   ― 
Function AI function   ― 
URV AI URV   ― 
LRV AI LRV   ― 
AO1 trim 4mA   ― 
AO1 Trim
AO1 trim 20mA   ― 
AO2 trim 4mA   ― 
AO2 Trim
AO2 trim 20mA   ― 
Flow direct Flow direction   ― 
Rate limit Rate limit   ― 
Dead time Dead time   ― 
Noise filter Noise filter   ― 
Pulsing flow Pulsing flow   ― 
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 162
Display HART
Power sync Power synchronize    
Set power freq Set power frequency    
Value select Density value select   ― 
Fixed density Density fixed value    
Std density Standard density   ― 
Std temperature Standard temperature   ― 
Coef A1 Temp coef A1   ― 
Coef A2 Temp coef A2   ― 
Specific heat Specific heat   ― 
Fixed temperature Calorific fix temp   ― 
High alarm High alarm   ― 
Low alarm Low alarm   ― 
HH alarm High high alarm   ― 
LL alarm Low low alarm   ― 
H/L alarm hyst Hi/Lo alarm hysteresis   ― 
Line 1 Display select1 ― ―  
Format PV Display format PV ― ―  
Line mode Display line ― ―  
Disp install Display installation ― ―  
― IRSW operation ― ―  
Tag No Tag ― ―  
Long tag Long tag ― ―  
Electrode size Electrode size   ― 
Model code Basic model code   ― 
Suffix config 1 Suffix config 1   ― 
Suffix config 2 Suffix config 2   ― 
Option 1 Option 1   ― 
Model code Remote sensor basic model code   ― 
Suffix config 1 Remote sensor suffix config 1   ― 
Suffix config 2 Remote sensor suffix config 2   ― 
Option 1 Remote sensor option 1   ― 
Trans serial No Transmitter serial No   ― 
Sensor serial No Sensor serial No   ― 
Function Adhesion function    
Threshold level 1 Adhesion level 1   ― 
Check cycle Adhesion check cycle   ― 
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 163
Display HART
Function Flow noise function   ― 
Threshold level 1 Flow noise level 1   ― 
Damp Flow noise damping   ― 
Span Flow noise span    
Function Low conductivity function   ― 
Low limit Conductivity low limit   ― 
Coil insul threshold Coil insulation threshold   ― 
IEX compare IEX compare   ― 
Diagnostic output Diagnostic output   ― 
Mode VF mode   ― 
VF No VF No   ― 
Release time Release time   ― 
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 164
4.13.4 Data Logging Function

When the optional code MC (microSD card) is selected, the data logging function can store up
to four process values to the microSD card. To use this function, it is necessary to specify a file
name, data storage interval,and ending time.
Stored data is saved in the “YOKOGAWA” folder as a “.TRD” file.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Diag/Service ► Data log ► (see below)
HART Maintenance root menu ► Data logging ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
File name File name Specifies the name of the file to be stored.
Interval time Interval time Specifies the data storage interval.*1
Start date Start date Displays the date to start the data logging function.
Start time Start time Displays the time to start the data logging function.
End time End time Specifies the time to end the data logging function.*2
Log 1 Log1 select Specifies process value 1 to be stored.*3
Specifies the execution of the data logging
Execute Logging Exe
function.*4
*1: From the table below, select the data storage interval.
Selection
Description
Display HART
1s 1 sec Sets the storage interval to 1 sec.
10 s 10 sec Sets the storage interval to 10 sec.
30 s 30 sec Sets the storage interval to 30 sec.
1 min 1 min Sets the storage interval to 1 min.
1h 1h Sets the storage interval to 1 hour.
*2: From the table below, select the ending time of the data logging function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
10 min 10 min Sets the ending time to 10 minutes later.
30 min 30 min Sets the ending time to 30 minutes later.
1h 1h Sets the ending time to 1 hour later.
3h 3h Sets the ending time to 3 hours later.
12 h 12 h Sets the ending time to 12 hours later.
24 h 24 h Sets the ending time to 24 hours (1 day) later.
72 h 72 h Sets the ending time to 72 hours (3 days) later.
240 h 240 h Sets the ending time to 240 hours (10 days) later.
720 h* 720 h* Sets the ending time to 720 hours (30 days) later.
1440 h* 1440 h* Sets the ending time to 1440 hours (60 days) later.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 165
*3: From the table below, select the process value to be stored.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Velocity Velocity Stores the flow velocity.
Volume flow Volume flow Stores the volumetric flow rate.
Mass flow Mass flow Stores the mass flow rate.
Stores the calorie.
Calorie Calorie
Stores the PV-mapped process value of Subsection
PV PV
4.1.2.
Stores the flow noise value.
Flow noise Flow noise
Stores the resistance value of the electrode
Adhesion Adhesion
adhesion detection.
Electrode A Electrode A Stores the voltage of electrode A.
Electrode B Electrode B Stores the voltage of electrode B.
Stores the peak value of the flow rate signal.
V peak V peak
*4: From the table below, select the use of the data logging function.
Selection
Description
Display HART
Not execute Not execute Does not execute the data logging function.
Execute Execute Executes the data logging function.
Setting data is stored on the microSD card at a specified storage interval during a period from the
start of the data logging function to the end. The file stored by the data logging function can be
opened as a text file.
Example: If the storage interval is set to “1 min”, data is stored as shown below.
…………
2017/01/0112:00:00 +9.9863E-01 +2.8235E+01 +1.4117E+04 +4.5600E-01
2017/01/0112:01:00 +9.9909E-01 +2.8248E+01 +1.4124E+04 +3.9717E-01
2017/01/0112:02:00 +9.9906E-01 +2.8248E+01 +1.4124E+04 +3.1753E-01
2017/01/0112:03:00 +9.9859E-01 +2.8234E+01 +1.4117E+04 +4.0430E-01
2017/01/0112:04:00 +9.9870E-01 +2.8237E+01 +1.4118E+04 +3.6609E-01
2017/01/0112:05:00 +9.9829E-01 +2.8226E+01 +1.4113E+04 +4.1892E-01
…………
Date and time Process Process Process Process

value 1 value 2 value 3 value 4
F0437.ai
The access ongoing to the microSD card can be confirmed by the icon on the display. For
example, the icons of “microSD card ready” and “Access to microSD card” are displayed
alternately and repeatedly because the product accesses the microSD card periodically during its
data logging.
When the microSD card cannot be accessed to remove, the icon of “Error accessing microSD
card” is displayed.
Insert the microSD card again when it is necessary to use this function again. An alarm of
“microSD failure” occurs when the microSD card has any problems.
Ready for microSD card Accessing microSD card
Disable to access microSD card
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 166
IMPORTANT
• When using the data logging function, be sure to set the date and time information.
• Before using the data logging function, make sure that the microSD card is prepared. It takes
approximately 1 minute until the product is ready to store data on the microSD card after it
has been turned on.
• Note that the date and time information are reset if this product is turned off.
• Note that if the microSD card runs out of free space, the subsequent data will not be stored.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 167
4.14 Parameter Protection

4.14.1 Software Write Protection Function
Write protect can be specified by two methods; the hardware write protect switch and software
write protect. When the write protect is set using one of these methods, data cannot be written
to a parameter. For details about the hardware write protection switch, refer to the Installation
Manual.
To enable the software write protection function, it is necessary to specify a “New password”
(eight alphanumeric characters, excluding lowercase). By inputting the password in
“Enable write”, it becomes possible to disable the write protection only for 10 minutes. The write
protection function can be completely disabled by entering eight spaces in “New password” while
the protection is disabled temporarily.
The write protection function can be configured with the following parameters.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Protection ► (see below)
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Protection ► (see below)
Parameter
Description
Display HART
Write protect sts Write protect Indicates the use of the write protection function.*1
Cancels the write protection function only for 10
Enable write Enable write 10 min
minutes.
Specifies a new pass word for the write protection
New password New password
function.
*1: Display of the use status of the write protection function

Value
Description
Display HART
The write protection function is not in use.
No No
(Parameter can be changed)
The write protection function is being used.
Yes Yes
(Parameter cannot be changed)
NOTE
The usage status of the write protect function can be checked by the icon displayed on the
parameter or display.
The following icons are displayed.
Icon Description
Write protect Disable
(Parameters can be changed)
Write protect Enable
(Parameter cannot be changed)
NOTE
When the write protection switch on the amplifier board is turned on, no parameters can be
changed.
To change a parameter, cancel the write protection function with the pre-specified password and
specify a new password.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<4. Functions> 168
If the password is forgotten, it is possible to temporarily disable the software write protection
function by using the Joker password.
When the write protection function is disabled using the Joker password, “Break” is displayed as
the software seal (because the write protection is not disabled with the regular route). To set the
software seal back to “Keep”, it needs to set the write protection again. When the write protection
is temporarily disabled using the formal password, the software seal is set back from “Break” to
“Keep”.
The use of the Joker password seal can be checked by the following parameter.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Protection ► Soft seal status
HART Device root menu ► Detailed setup ► Protection ► Software seal
Check the use of the Joker password depending on the following parameters.
Value
Description
Display HART
Keep Keep Normal
Disable the write protection function using the Joker
Break Break
password.
NOTE
If it is necessary to use the Joker password, contact Yokogawa sales office or representative.
4.14.2 Display Restriction Function

Access to the service mode is limited.
Menu path
Display Device setup ► Detailed setup ► Protection ► Key code
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<5. Parameter Lists> 169
5. Parameter Lists
This chapter shows parameter lists of the display and HART communication.
Each parameter is set as specified at the time of ordering. Since other parameters have default
values set, be sure to refer to this chapter when changing them.
IMPORTANT
If this product is turned off before 30 seconds after setting the parameters, the settings will not
be saved correctly. Please keep the product turned on for over 30 seconds after setting the
parameters.
NOTE
To obtain correct flow signals, it is necessary to set the nominal size, flow rate span and meter
factor of the flow sensor. The nominal size and meter factor of the flow sensor are set on this
product when shipped from the manufacturing factory, and a customer is not required to set
them.
If a particular parameters is specified at the time of order, this product is shipped with the
parameter specified. If a parameter is not specified at the time of order, that parameter needs to
be set by the customer.
NOTE
The available functions and parameters displayed vary depending on communication and I/O
code specified at the time of ordering.
: Parameter displayed
Communication and I/O Code
Function of
Description JA JE JG
terminal JB JC JD JF JH JJ JK JP JQ JR JS JT
E J L
Regardless of the code selection,
Analog
parameters related to analog output 1               
output 1
are displayed.
Depending on the code selection,
Analog parameters related to analog output 2
     
output 2 may not be displayed.
No.7-6 to 7-10, 7-21 to 7-23, 13-11
Pulse Regardless of the code selection,
Status parameters related to pulse/status               
output 1 output 1 are displayed.
Pulse
parameters related to pulse/status
Status        
output 2 may not be displayed.
output 2
No.5-12 to 5-24, 13-13 to 13-14
Status
parameters related to the status 
output 3
output may not be displayed.
parameters related to the status input
Status input     
may not be displayed.
No.6-3 to 6-5, 13-7
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Communication and I/O Code
Function of
Description JA JE JG
terminal JB JC JD JF JH JJ JK JP JQ JR JS JT
E J L
parameters related to the analog input
Analog
may not be displayed.   
input
No.7-11 to 7-17, 7-24 to 7-26, 8-13 to
8-21, 13-6, 13-15
The parameter list consists of the following items.

No. Symbol(G) = only available for AXG, not for AXW
Parameter Name Indicates a parameter name.
Indicates options for select type data.
Indicates the setting range and the number of decimal places for numeric-type data.
Data range
Indicates the limited number of characters for alphanumeric type data.
Symbol(G) = only available for AXG, not for AXW
Indicates parameters which can be displayed and set.
R: Displayed only, RW: Displayed and specified.
However, when changing parameters on the display, a parameter which can be set depends
on operation levels.
R/W Operator: Possible to set a display language on the display and parameters related to
display items.
Maintenance: Possible to set parameters allowed to set with the operator level and
parameters related to zero adjustment.
Specialist: Possible to set all writable parameters.
Default value Indicates the default value upon shipment from the manufacturing factory.
Unit Indicates the unit of the data range.
Reference Reference page of parameter contents.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.1 Display Parameters

These parameters are related to flow and totalizer display.
Parameter Name Data Range
No. R/W Default Value Unit Reference
HART Display HART Display
1-1 Process variables - -999.999 to +999.999 - R - % P.41
root menu ► Number of decimal places: 3
Dynamic variables ►
PV % rnge
Process variables Device setup ► -99999.9 to +99999.9
root menu ► Process variables ► Number of decimal places: 1
Device variables ► Flow rate(%)
Disp flowrate%
1-2 Process variables - -999999 to +999999 - R - Flow velocity P.41
root menu ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 No.3-15
Dynamic variables Volumetric
► PV flow
Process variables Device setup ► -999999 to +999999 rate:
root menu ► Process variables ► Number of decimal places: No.3-16/
Device variables ► Flow rate 0 to 5 No.3-19
Disp flowrate Mass flow
rate:
No.3-17/
No.3-19
Flow noise
cm/s
1-3 Process variables Device setup ► 0.000 to +99.999 0.000 to +99.999 R - mA P.76
root menu ► Process variables ► Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
View outputs ► Analog out 1
AO1 current
1-4 Process variables Device setup ► -999999 to +999999 -99999999 to +99999999 R - No.4-1 P.57
root menu ► Process variables Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places:
Device variables ► ► Totalizer ► 0 to 5
Totalizer1 Totalizer 1
1-7 Process variables Device setup ► -INF*2 to +INF*2 -99999999 to +99999999 R - - P.58
root menu ► Process variables Number of decimal places: 0 Number of decimal places: 0
Totalizer count ► ► Totalizer ►
Totalizer1 count Totalizer 1 count
root menu ► Device Process variables ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places:
variables ► Velocity Velocity 0 to 5
1-11 Process variables Device setup ► -999999 to +999999 -999999 to +999999 R - No.3-16/ P.42
root menu ► Device Process variables ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: No.3-19
variables ► Volume Volume 0 to 5
flow
1-12 Process variables Device setup ► -999999 to +999999 -999999 to +999999 R - No.3-17/ P.42
root menu ► Device Process variables Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: No.3-19
variables ► Mass ► Mass 0 to 5
flow
1-13 Process variables Device setup ► 0.000 to +99.999 0.000 to +99.999 R - mA P.76
(G) root menu ► Process variables ► Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
View outputs ► Analog out 2
AO2 current
*2: The range of single precision float (IEEE 754).
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.2 Easy Configuration Parameters

These parameters are frequently used general functions. Parameters for No.2-2 to 2-14 can be
set by using the Easy setup wizard function.
2-1 Device root menu ► Device setup ► English English RW English - P.120
Detailed setup ► Language French French
Display ► German German
Display operation Italian Italian
configuration ► Spanish Spanish
Language Portuguese Portuguese
Russian Russian
Chinese Chinese
Japanese Japanese
2-2 Device root menu ► Device setup ► +0.1 to +200.0 +0.1 to +200.0 RW 3.0 s P.45
Basic setup ► Easy setup wizard Number of decimal places: 1 Number of decimal places: 1
Volume flow ► ► Volume ►
Volume flow damping Damp AO/F
AO/frequency
2-3 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.0 to +200.0 0.0 to +200.0 RW 3.0 s P.46
Basic setup ► Easy setup wizard Number of decimal places: 1 Number of decimal places: 1
Volume flow ► ► Volume ►
Volume flow damping Damp pls/ttl
pulse/total
2-4 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Ml(Megaliter) Ml(Megaliter) RW m³ *1 - P.43
Basic setup ► Easy setup wizard ► m3 m³
Volume flow ► Volume ► Unit kl(Kiloliter) kl(kiloliter)
Volume flow unit l(liter) l(liter)
cm3 cm³
2-5 Device root menu ► Device setup ► /s /s RW /h *1 - P.43
Basic setup ► Easy setup wizard ► /min /min
Volume flow ► Volume ► Time unit /h /h
Time unit
2-6 Device root menu ► Device setup ► +0.00001 to +INF*2 +0.00001 to +999999 RW 1.00 *1 No.3-16/ P.44
Basic setup ► Easy setup wizard ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: No.3-19
Volume flow ► Volume ► Span 0 to 5
Volume flow span
2-7 Device root menu ► Device setup ► n unit/P n unit/P RW Unit/P *1 - P.68
Detailed setup ► Easy setup wizard ► u unit/P u unit/P
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out ► m unit/P m unit/P
Pulse/Status output1 P1 unit Unit/P Unit/P
► Pulse1 rate unit k unit/P k unit/P
M unit/P M unit/P
n P/unit n P/unit
u P/unit u P/unit
m P/unit m P/unit
P/unit P/unit
k P/unit k P/unit
M P/unit M P/unit
2-8 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00000 to +INF*2 0.00000 to +999999 RW 0.0 No.5-4 P.67
Detailed setup ► Easy setup wizard ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places:
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out ► 0 to 5
Pulse/Status output1 P1 val
► Pulse1 rate value
2-9 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0 to 12500 0 to 12500 RW 0 Hz P.69
Detailed setup ► Easy setup wizard ► Number of decimal places: 0 Number of decimal places: 0
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out ►
Pulse/Status output1 F1 at 0%
► Frequency1 at 0%
Detailed setup ► Easy setup wizard ► Number of decimal places: 0 Number of decimal places: 0
Pulse/Status output1 F1 at 100%
► Frequency1 at
100%
*1: Determined based on the information about specified items at the time of ordering and the sensor to be combined with.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
2-11 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Flow rate(%) Flow rate(%) RW PV - P.121
Detailed setup ► Easy setup wizard ► PV PV
Display ► Display set► Line 1 Velocity Velocity
Line select ► Volume flow Volume flow
Display select1 Mass flow Mass flow
Flow rate(%Bar) Flow rate(%Bar)
Calorie(G) Calorie(G)
Tag number Tag number
Long tag Long tag
Commun Protocol Commun protocol
Adhesion Adhesion
Analog out1 Analog out 1
Analog out2(G) Analog out 2(G)
Flow noise level(G) Flow noise level(G)
2-12 Device root menu ► Device setup ► None None RW Flow rate(%) - P.121
Detailed setup ► Easy setup wizard ► Flow rate(%) Flow rate(%)
Display ► Display set ► Line 2 PV PV
Line select ► Velocity Velocity
Display select2 Volume flow Volume flow
Mass flow Mass flow
2-13 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Totalizer2 Totalizer 2 RW Analog out 1 - P.121
Detailed setup ► Easy setup wizard ► Totalizer3 Totalizer 3
Display ► Display set ► Line 3 Tag number Tag number
Line select ► Long tag Long tag
Display select3 Commun Protocol Commun protocol
Adhesion Adhesion
2-14 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Not execute Not execute RW Not execute - P.55
Basic setup ► Easy setup wizard Execute Execute
Autozero ► ►Autozero exe
Autozero Exe
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.3 Basic Configuration Parameters

These parameters are related to basic settings, such as a flow sensor.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Number of decimal places: 1 Number of decimal places: 1
Process variables ► Pro var ► Velocity ►
Velocity ► Damp AO/F
Velocity damping AO/
frequency
Process variables ► Pro var ► Velocity ►
Velocity ► Damp pls/ttl
Velocity damping
pulse/total
Process variables ► Pro var ► Volume ►
Volume flow ► Damp AO/F
Volume flow damping
AO/frequency
Process variables ► Pro var ► Volume ►
Volume flow ► Damp pls/ttl
Volume flow damping
pulse/total
Process variables ► Pro var ► Mass ►
Mass flow ► Damp AO/F
Mass flow damping
AO/frequency
Process variables ► Pro var ► Mass ►
Mass flow ► Damp pls/ttl
Mass flow damping
pulse/total
Process variables ► Pro var ► Calorie ►
Calorific ► Damp AO/F
Calorific value
damping AO/
frequency
Calorific ► Damp pls/ttl
Calorific value
damping pulse/total
3-9 Device root menu ► Device setup ► +0.0100 to +3.0000 +0.0100 to +3.0000 RW 1.0000 *1 - P.49
Sensor ► Low MF Sensor ► Low MF
3-10 Device root menu ► Device setup ► +0.0100 to +3.0000 +0.0100 to +3.0000 RW 1.0000 *1 - P.49
Sensor ► High MF Sensor ► High MF
3-11 Device root menu ► Device setup ► ADMAG AXG(G) ADMAG AXG(G) RW ADMAG - P.50
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ADMAG AXW ADMAG AXW AXG *1
Sensor ► ► Sensor ► ADMAG AXF(G) ADMAG AXF(G)
Flow sensor select Flow sensor sel ADMAG ADMAG
ADMAG AE(G) ADMAG AE(G)
ADMAG SE ADMAG SE
YEWMAG YEWMAG
Calibrator Calibrator
Other1 Other 1
Other2 Other 2
Other3(G) Other 3(G)
3-12 Device root menu ► Device setup ► mm mm RW mm - P.51
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup inch inch
Sensor ► ► Sensor ►
Nominal size unit Nominal size unit
3-13 Device root menu ► Device setup ► +0.01000 to +3000.0 +0.01000 to +3000.0 RW 100 *1 No.3-12 P.51
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places:
Sensor ► ► Sensor ► 0 to 5
Nominal size Nominal size
IM 01E21A02-02EN
3-14 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Velocity Velocity RW Volume *1
- P.41
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Volume Volume
Process variables ► ► Pro var ► Mass Mass
PV flow select PV flow select Diag(G) Diag(G)
3-15 Device root menu ► Device setup ► m/s m/s RW m/s *1 - P.43
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► ft/s ft/s
Process variables ► Pro var ► Velocity
Velocity ► ► Unit
Velocity unit
3-16 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Ml(Megaliter) Ml(Megaliter) RW m³ *1 - P.43
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► m3 m³
Process variables ► Pro var ► Volume kl(Kiloliter) kl(kiloliter)
Volume flow ► ► Unit l(liter) l(liter)
Volume flow unit cm3 cm³
kcf kcf
cf cf
mcf mcf
Mgal(US) Mgal(US)
kgal(US) kgal(US)
gal(US) gal(US)
mgal(US) mgal(US)
kbbl(US Oil) kbbl(US Oil)
bbl(US Oil) bbl(US Oil)
mbbl(US Oil) mbbl(US Oil)
ubbl(US Oil) ubbl(US Oil)
kbbl(US Beer) kbbl(US Beer)
bbl(US Beer) bbl(US Beer)
mbbl(US Beer) mbbl(US Beer)
ubbl(US Beer) ubbl(US Beer)
3-17 Device root menu ► Device setup ► t t RW kg *1 - P.43
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► kg kg
Process variables ► Pro var ► Mass g g
Mass flow ► ► Unit klb klb
Mass flow unit lb lb
3-18 Device root menu ► Device setup ► MJ MJ RW J - P.43
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► kJ kJ
Process variables ► Pro var ► Calorie J J
Calorie ► ►Unit kcal kcal
Calorific unit cal cal
BTU BTU
3-19 Device root menu ► Device setup ► /s /s RW /h *1 - P.43
(G) Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► /min /min
Process variables ► Pro var ► Volume ► /h /h
Volume flow ► Time unit /d /d
Time unit or
or Device setup ►
Device root menu ► Detailed setup ►
Detailed setup ► Pro var ► Mass ►
Process variables ► Time unit
Mass flow ► Time or
unit Device setup ►
or Detailed setup ►
Device root menu ► Pro var ► Calorie ►
Detailed setup ► Time unit
Process variables ►
Calorie ► Time unit
3-20 Device root menu ► Device setup ► +0.00001 to +INF*2 +0.00001 to +999999 RW 1.00000 *1 No.3-15 P.44
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places:
Process variables ► Pro var ► Velocity 0 to 5
Velocity ► ► Span
Velocity span
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: No.3-19
Process variables ► Pro var ► Volume 0 to 5
Volume flow ► ► Span
Volume flow span
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: No.3-19 [kg/h]
Process variables ► Pro var ► Mass ► 0 to 5
Mass flow ► Span
Mass flow span
3-23 Device root menu ► Device setup ► +0.00000 to +INF*2 +0.00001 to +999999 RW 1.00000 No.3-18/ P.44
(G) Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: No.3-19 [J/h]
Process variables ► Pro var ► Calorie 0 to 5
Calorie ► ► Span
Calorific flow span
IM 01E21A02-02EN
3-24 Device root menu ► Device setup ► -99.999 to +99.999 -99.999 to +99.999 R - m/s P.52
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
Process variables ► ► Pro var ►
Velocity check Velocity check
3-25 Device root menu ► Device setup ► No No RW No - P.53
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Yes Yes
Use span► ► User Span ►
User span select User span AO1 ►
AO1 Select
3-26 Device root menu ► Device setup ► ASCII 8 characters ASCII 8 characters RW All Space - P.53
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup
User unit AO1 User span AO1
► Unit
3-27 Device root menu ► Device setup ► +0.00001 to +INF*2 +0.00001 to +999999 RW 100.000 - P.54
Use span► ► User Span ► 0 to 5
User span AO1 User span AO1 ►
Span
(G) Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Yes Yes
User span select User span AO2 ►
AO2 Select
(G) Detailed setup ► Detailed setup
User unit AO2 User span AO2
► Unit
3-30 Device root menu ► Device setup ► +0.00001 to +INF*2 +0.00001 to +999999 RW 100.000 - P.54
(G) Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places:
Use span► ► User Span ► 0 to 5
User span AO2 User span AO2 ►
Span
Basic setup ► Diag/Service ► Execute Execute
Autozero ► Autozero ► Execute
Autozero Exe
3-32 Device root menu ► Device setup ► -99.999 to +99.999 -99.999 to +99.999 RW 0.000 cm/s P.56
Basic setup ► Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
Autozero ► Autozero ► Result
Zero value ► Zero value
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.4 Totalization Configuration Parameters

These parameters are related to the totalization function.
4-1 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Ml(Megaliter) Ml(Megaliter) R - - P.57
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup m3 m³
Totalizer ► ► Totalizer ► kl(Kiloliter) kl(kiloliter)
Totalizer1 ► Totalizer 1 ► Unit l(liter) l(liter)
Total1 unit cm3 cm³
t t
kg kg
g g
kcf kcf
cf cf
mcf mcf
Mgal(US) Mgal(US)
kgal(US) kgal(US)
gal(US) gal(US)
mgal(US) mgal(US)
klb(US) klb(US)
lb(US) lb(US)
Totalizer ► ► Totalizer ►
Totalizer1 ► Totalizer 1 ►
Total1 count unit Count unit
4-3 Device root menu ► Device setup ► -INF*2 to +INF*2 -999999 to +999999 RW 1.00000 No.4-1 P.58
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Unable to input 0 Number of decimal places:
Totalizer ► ► Totalizer ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 0 to 5
Total1 conv factor Conv factor
4-4 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00000 to +INF*2 0.00000 to +999999 RW 0.00000 *1 Volumetric flow P.47
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: rate:
Totalizer ► ► Totalizer ► 0 to 5 No.3-16/
Totalizer1 ► Totalizer 1 ► Low cut No.3-19
Total1 low cut Mass flow rate:
No.3-17/
No.3-19
Calorie:
No.3-18/
No.3-19
4-5 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Measured value Measured value RW Stop*4 - P.60
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Stop Stop
Totalizer ► ► Totalizer ► Last valid Last valid
Total1 fail opts Failure opts
4-6 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Balanced Balanced RW Only positive - P.61
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Absolute Absolute
Totalizer ► ► Totalizer ► Only positive Only positive
Totalizer1 ► Totalizer 1 ► Options Only negative Only negative
Total1 options Hold Hold
4-7 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Stop Stop RW Stop - P.61
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Start Start
Total1 Start/Stop Start/Stop
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Reset Reset
Totalizer ► ► Totalizer ► Preset Preset
Total1 Reset/Preset Reset/Preset
4-9 Device root menu ► Device setup ► -INF*2 to +INF*2 -999999 to +999999 RW 0.00000 Volumetric flow P.62
Totalizer ► ► Totalizer ► 0 to 5 No.3-16
Totalizer1 ► Totalizer 1 ► Mass flow rate:
Total1 preset value Preset value No.3-17
Calorie:
No.3-18
*3: Displayed only when analog input is valid.
*4: When Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) is R2.01.01 or earlier, the default value is "Run".
IM 01E21A02-02EN
4-10 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00000 to +INF *2
0.00000 to +999999 RW 0.00000 Volumetric flow P.59
Totalizer ► ► Totalizer ► 0 to 5 No.3-16
Totalizer1 ► Totalizer 1 ► Mass flow rate:
Total1 set point Set point No.3-17
Calorie:
No.3-18
4-11 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Ml(Megaliter) Ml(Megaliter) RW m³ - P.57
t t
kg kg
g g
kcf kcf
cf cf
mcf mcf
Mgal(US) Mgal(US)
kgal(US) kgal(US)
gal(US) gal(US)
mgal(US) mgal(US)
klb(US) klb(US)
lb(US) lb(US)
MJ*3 MJ*3
kJ*3 kJ*3
J*3 J*3
kcal*3 kcal*3
cal*3 cal*3
BTU*3 BTU*3
4-14 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00000 to +INF*2 0.00000 to +999999 RW 0.00000 No.4-11/ P.47
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: No.3-19
Totalizer ► ► Totalizer ► 0 to 5
Totalizer2 ► Totalizer 2 ► Low cut
Total2 low cut
4-16 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Balanced Balanced RW Only negative - P.61
IM 01E21A02-02EN
4-19 Device root menu ► Device setup ► -INF to +INF
*2 *2
-999999 to +999999 RW 0.00000 No.4-11 P.62
Total2 preset value Preset value
Total2 set point Set point
4-21 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Ml(Megaliter) Ml(Megaliter) RW m³ - P.57
t t
kg kg
g g
kcf kcf
cf cf
mcf mcf
Mgal(US) Mgal(US)
kgal(US) kgal(US)
gal(US) gal(US)
mgal(US) mgal(US)
klb(US) klb(US)
lb(US) lb(US)
MJ*3 MJ*3
kJ*3 kJ*3
J*3 J*3
kcal*3 kcal*3
cal*3 cal*3
BTU*3 BTU*3
4-24 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00000 to +INF*2 0.00000 to +999999 RW 0.00000 No.4-21/ P.47
Totalizer3 ► Totalizer 3 ► Low cut
Total3 low cut
4-26 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Balanced Balanced RW Balanced - P.61
IM 01E21A02-02EN
*2 *2
-999999 to +999999 RW 0.00000 No.4-21 P.62
Total3 preset value Preset value
Total3 set point Set point
4-31 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Off Off RW On - P.59
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup On On
Totalizer reset mode Reset mode
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.5 Pulse Output Configuration Parameters

These parameters are related to the pulse/status output 1/2.
5-1 Device root menu ► Device setup ► No function No function RW Fixedpulseoutput - P.63
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Fixed pulse output Fixed pulse output
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out Frequency output Frequency output
Pulse/Status output1 ► PO1/SO1 ► Status output Status output
► Pulse1 output Output mode
mode
5-2 Device root menu ► Device setup ► On active On active RW On active - P.66
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Off active Off active
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out
Pulse/Status output1 ► PO1/SO1 ►
► Pulse1 active Active mode
mode
5-3 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.05 ms 0.05 ms RW Duty cycle 50% *1*3 - P.65
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► 0.1 ms 0.1 ms
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out 0.5 ms 0.5 ms
Pulse/Status output1 ► PO1/SO1 ► 1 ms 1 ms
► Pulse1 fix width Fix width 20 ms 20 ms
33 ms 33 ms
50 ms 50 ms
100 ms 100 ms
200 ms 200 ms
330 ms 330 ms
500 ms 500 ms
1000 ms 1000 ms
2000 ms 2000 ms
Duty cycle 50% Duty cycle 50%
5-4 Device root menu ► Device setup ► n unit/P n unit/P RW Unit/P *1 - P.68
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► u unit/P u unit/P
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out m unit/P m unit/P
Pulse/Status output1 ► PO1/SO1 ► Unit/P Unit/P
► Pulse1 rate unit Rate unit k unit/P k unit/P
M unit/P M unit/P
n P/unit n P/unit
u P/unit u P/unit
m P/unit m P/unit
P/unit P/unit
k P/unit k P/unit
M P/unit M P/unit
5-5 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00000 to +INF*2 0.00000 to +999999 RW 0.0 *1 No.5-4 P.67
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out 0 to 5
► Pulse1 rate value Rate value
5-6 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00000 to +INF*2 0.00000 to +999999 RW 0.0 *1 Flow velocity P.47
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out ► 0 to 5 Volumetric flow
Pulse/Status output1 PO1/SO1 ► Low cut rate:
► Pulse1 low cut No.3-16/
No.3-19
Mass flow rate:
No.3-17/
No.3-19
Flow noise
cm/s
5-7 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0 pps 0 pps RW 0 pps - P.64
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Measured value Measured value
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out Last valid Last valid
Pulse/Status output1 ► PO1/SO1 ► Max pps Max pps
► Pulse1 alarm out Alarm out
► Frequency1 at 0% Frequency at 0%
► Frequency1 at Frequency at 100%
100%
*3: When Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) is R2.01.01 or earlier, the default value is 0.05 ms.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5-10 Device root menu ► Device setup ► No function No function RW No function - P.70
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Alarm output Alarm output
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out Warning output Warning output
Pulse/Status output1 ► PO1/SO1 ► Total limit 1 Total limit 1
► Status output1 SO1 function Total limit 2 Total limit 2
function Total limit 3 Total limit 3
H/L alarm H/L alarm
HH/LL alarm HH/LL alarm
Auto2 range Auto 2 range
Ext2 answer Ext 2 answer
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Absolute Absolute
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out ► Only positive Only positive
Pulse/Status output1 PO1/SO1 ► Options Only negative Only negative
► Pulse1 option
5-12 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Normal Normal RW Normal - P.67
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► For magnetic counter For magnetic counter
► Pulse2 active Active pulse
pulse
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Fixed pulse output Fixed pulse output
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out Frequency output Frequency output
Pulse/Status output2 ► PO2/SO2 ► Status output Status output
► Pulse2 output Output mode
mode
5-14 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Non-Connect No connect RW No connect - P.64
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Velocity Velocity
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out Volume flow Volume flow
Pulse/Status output2 ► PO2/SO2 ► Mass flow Mass flow
► Pulse2 select Pulse select Calorie(G) Calorie(G)
Diag(G) Diag(G)
► Pulse2 active Active mode
mode
5-16 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.05 ms 0.05 ms RW Duty cycle 50%*3 - P.65
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► 0.1 ms 0.1 ms
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out 0.5 ms 0.5 ms
Pulse/Status output2 ► PO2/SO2 ► 1 ms 1 ms
► Pulse2 fix width Fix width 20 ms 20 ms
33 ms 33 ms
50 ms 50 ms
100 ms 100 ms
200 ms 200 ms
330 ms 330 ms
500 ms 500 ms
1000 ms 1000 ms
2000 ms 2000 ms
Duty cycle 50% Duty cycle 50%
5-17 Device root menu ► Device setup ► n unit/P n unit/P RW Unit/P - P.68
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► u unit/P u unit/P
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out m unit/P m unit/P
Pulse/Status output2 ► PO2/SO2 ► Unit/P Unit/P
► Pulse2 rate unit Rate unit k unit/P k unit/P
M unit/P M unit/P
n P/unit n P/unit
u P/unit u P/unit
m P/unit m P/unit
P/unit P/unit
k P/unit k P/unit
M P/unit M P/unit
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out 0 to 5
► Pulse2 rate value Rate value
IM 01E21A02-02EN
0.00000 to +999999 RW 0.0 Flow velocity P.47
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out ► 0 to 5 Volumetric flow
Pulse/Status output2 PO2/SO2 ► Low cut rate:
► Pulse2 low cut No.3-16/
No.3-19
Mass flow rate:
No.3-17/
No.3-19
Flow noise
cm/s
5-20 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0 pps 0 pps RW 0 pps - P.64
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Measured value Measured value
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out Last valid Last valid
Pulse/Status output2 ► PO2/SO2 ► Max pps Max pps
► Pulse2 alarm out Alarm out
► Frequency2 at 0% Frequency at 0%
► Frequency2 at Frequency at 100%
100%
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out Warning output Warning output
Pulse/Status output2 ► PO2/SO2 ► Total limit 1 Total limit 1
► Status output2 SO2 function Total limit 2 Total limit 2
H/L alarm H/L alarm
System alarm System alarm
Process alarm Process alarm
Setting alarm Setting alarm
50:Sig overflow Signal overflow
51:Empty detect Empty detect
53:Adh over lv4 Adh over lv 4
85:Cable miscon Cable miscon
86:Coil insulate Coil insulation
87:Adh over lv3 Adhesion lv 3
88:LC warn LC warn
89:Insu detect Insu detect
90:FLN over lv3 FLN over lv 3
93:Verif warn Verif warn
94:FC noise warn Fact noise warn
Lo alarm Low alarm
Lo Lo alarm LL alarm
Hi alarm High alarm
Hi Hi alarm HH alarm
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Absolute Absolute
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out ► Only positive Only positive
Pulse/Status output2 PO2/SO2 ► Options Only negative Only negative
► Pulse2 option
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.6 Status Input and Output Configuration

Parameters
These parameters are related to the status input, status output and multi range.
Status output3 ► SO3 ► Active mode
Status output3 active
mode
Pulse/Status ► Pulse/Status out ► Warning output Warning output
Status output3 ► SO3 ► Function Total limit 1 Total limit 1
Status output3 Total limit 2 Total limit 2
H/L alarm H/L alarm
System alarm System alarm
Process alarm Process alarm
Setting alarm Setting alarm
50:Sig overflow Signal overflow
51:Empty detect Empty detect
53:Adh over lv4 Adh over lv 4
85:Cable miscon Cable miscon
86:Coil insulate Coil insulation
87:Adh over lv3 Adhesion lv 3
88:LC warn LC warn
89:Insu detect Insu detect
93:Verif warn Verif warn
94:FC noise warn Fact noise warn
Lo alarm Low alarm
Lo Lo alarm LL alarm
Hi alarm High alarm
Hi Hi alarm HH alarm
6-3 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Short(On) active Short(On) act RW Short(On) act - P.74
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Open(Off) active Open(Off) act
Pulse/Status ► Status in ► SI3 ►
Status input3 ► Active mode
Status input3 active
mode
6-4 Device root menu ► Device setup ► No function No function RW - P.75
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► 0% Signal Lock 0% signal lock
Pulse/Status ► Status in ► SI3 ► Ext auto zero Ext auto zero
Status input3 ► Function Total preset 1 Total preset 1
Status input3 Total preset 2 Total preset 2
function Total preset 3 Total preset 3
Ext2 ranges Ext 2 ranges
0% Signal Lock 2 0% signal lock 2
6-5 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Open Open R - - -
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Short Short
Pulse/Status ► Status in ► SI3 ►
Status input3 ► State
Status input3 State
6-6 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00001 to +INF*2 0.00001 to +999999 RW 1.0 Flow velocity P.83
Multi range ► ► Multi range ► 0 to 5 Volumetric flow
Forward span 2 Forward span 2 rate:
No.3-16/
No.3-19
Mass flow rate:
No.3-17/
No.3-19
Flow noise
cm/s
IM 01E21A02-02EN
6-7 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00001 to +INF*2
Reverse span 1 Reverse span 1 rate:
No.3-16/
No.3-19
Mass flow rate:
No.3-17/
No.3-19
Flow noise
cm/s
6-8 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00001 to +INF*2 0.00001 to +999999 RW 1.0 Flow velocity P.83
Reverse span 2 Reverse span 2 rate:
No.3-16/
No.3-19
Mass flow rate:
No.3-17/
No.3-19
Flow noise
cm/s
6-9 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0 to 15 0 to 15 RW 10 % P.84
Multi range ► ► Multi range ►
Auto range hyst Auto range hyst
6-10 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0 to 8 0 to 8 RW 2 % P.86
Multi range ► ► Multi range ►
Bi direction hyst Bi direction hyst
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.7 Analog Output/Input Configuration

Parameters
These parameters are related to analog output 1/2 and analog input.
Analog output/input Analog out/in ► AO1 0 to 5 Volumetric flow
► Analog output1 ► ► Low cut rate:
AO1 low cut No.3-16/
No.3-19
Mass flow rate:
No.3-17/
No.3-19
Flow noise
cm/s
7-2 Device root menu ► Device setup ► +4.000 to +21.600 +4.000 to +21.600 RW 20.500 mA P.77
Analog output/input Analog out/in ► AO1
► Analog output1 ► ► High limit
AO1 high limit
► Analog output1 ► ► Low limit
AO1 low limit
7-4 Device root menu ► Device setup ► < 2.4 mA < 2.4 mA RW > 21.6 mA*1 - P.79
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► 3.8 mA 3.8 mA
Analog output/input Analog out/in ► AO1 4 mA 4 mA
► Analog output1 ► ► Alarm out 20.5 mA 20.5 mA
AO1 alarm out > 21.6 mA > 21.6 mA
Hold Hold
7-5 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Normal range Normal range RW Normal range - P.78
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Abs range Abs range
► Analog output1 ► ► Range mode
AO1 range mode
7-6 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Non-Connect No connect RW No connect - P.76
(G) Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Velocity Velocity
Analog output/input Analog out/in ► AO2 Volume flow Volume flow
► Analog output2 ► ► AO2 select Mass flow Mass flow
AO2 select Calorie Calorie
Diag Diag
(G) Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places:
Analog output/input Analog out/in ► AO2 0 to 5
► Analog output2 ► ► Low cut
AO2 low cut
(G) Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
► Analog output2 ► ► High limit
AO2 high limit
► Analog output2 ► ► Low limit
AO2 low limit
7-10 Device root menu ► Device setup ► < 2.4 mA < 2.4 mA RW > 21.6 mA - P.79
(G) Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► 3.8 mA 3.8 mA
Analog output/input Analog out/in ► AO2 4 mA 4 mA
► Analog output2 ► ► Alarm out 20.5 mA 20.5 mA
AO2 alarm out > 21.6 mA > 21.6 mA
Hold Hold
(G) Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Monitoring Monitoring
Analog output/ Analog out/in ► AI ► Diff temperature Diff temperature
input ► Function Ext temperature Ext temperature
Analog input ► AI
function
Analog output/input Analog out/in ► AI ►
► Analog input ► AI High limit
high limit
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Analog output/input Analog out/in ► AI ►
► Analog input ► Low limit
AI low limit
7-14 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.000 to +22.730 0.000 to +22.730 R 0.000 mA P.81
Analog output/ Analog out/in ► AI
input ► ► Value
Analog input ► AI
current
7-15 Device root menu ► Device setup ► deg C °C RW deg C/°C - P.81
(G) Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► deg F °F
Analog output/input Analog out/in ► AI K K
► Analog input ► ► Unit
AI unit
7-16 Device root menu ► Device setup ► -999.9 to +999.9 -999.9 to +999.9 RW 120.0 No.7-15 P.82
Analog output/input Analog out/in ► AI
► Analog input ► ► URV
AI URV
Analog output/input Analog out/in ► AI
► Analog input ► ► LRV
AI LRV
7-18 Maintenance root Device setup ► Not execute Not execute RW Not execute - P.80
menu ► AO/AI trim Diag/Service ► Execute Execute
► AO trim ► Clear AO/AI trim ► AO trim
D/A trim 1 ► AO1 trim clear
7-19 Maintenance root Device setup ► 3.200 to 5.600 3.200 to 5.600 RW 4.000 mA P.80
menu ► AO/AI trim Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
► AO trim ► AO1 AO/AI trim ► AO trim
trim ► AO1 trim 4mA
7-20 Device setup ► 18.400 to 21.600 18.400 to 21.600 RW 20.000 mA P.80
Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
AO/AI trim ► AO trim
► AO1 trim 20mA
(G) menu ► AO/AI trim Diag/Service ► Execute Execute
► AO trim ► Clear AO/AI trim ► AO trim
D/A trim 2 ► AO2 trim clear
(G) menu ► AO/AI trim Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
► AO trim ► AO2 AO/AI trim ► AO trim
trim ► AO2 trim 4mA
(G) Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
AO/AI trim ► AO trim
► AO2 trim 20mA
(G) menu ► AO/AI trim Diag/Service ► Execute Execute
► AI trim ► Clear AO/AI trim ► AI trim
AI trim ► Trim clear
(G) menu ► AO/AI trim Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
► AI trim ► AI trim AO/AI trim ► AI trim
► Trim 4mA
(G) Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
AO/AI trim ► AI trim
► Trim 20mA
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.8 Auxiliary Function Configuration

Parameters
These parameters are related to the flow direction, rate limit, low cut, temperature correction for
density, or calorie calculation.
8-1 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Forward Forward RW Forward - P.92
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Reverse Reverse
AUX calculation ► AUX calculation ►
Flow direction Flow direct
8-2 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 to 10.0 RW 5.0 % P.92
Rate limit Rate limit
8-3 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.0 to 15.0 0.0 to 15.0 RW 0.0 s P.92
Dead time Dead time
8-4 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Manual Manual RW Manual - P.92
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Level1 Level 1
AUX calculation ► AUX calculation ► Level2 Level 2
Noise filter Noise filter Level3 Level 3
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Yes Yes
Pulsing flow Pulsing flow
8-6 Device root menu ► Device setup ► No No RW Yes - P.95
Power synchronize Power sync
8-7 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 47.00 to 63.00 47.00 to 63.00 RW 50.00 Hz P.95
Set power frequency Set power freq
8-8 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00 to 99.99 0.00 to 99.99 R - Hz P.95
IEX power frequency Iex power frequency
8-9 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00 to 99.99 0.00 to 99.99 R - Hz P.95
Measured power Meas power freq
frequency
8-10 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Fixed value Fixed value RW Fixed value - P.51
(G) Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► Correction value Correction value
Process variables ► Pro var ► Density ►
Density ► Value select
Density value select
8-11 Device root menu ► Device setup ► kg/m3 kg/m3 RW kg/m3 - P.51
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ► lb/gal lb/gal
Process variables ► Pro var ► Density lb/cf lb/cf
Density ► ► Unit
Density unit
8-12 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00000 to 999999 0.00000 to 999999 RW 0 *1 No.8-11 P.51
Process variables ► Pro var ► Density ► 0 to 5
Density ► Fixed density
Density fixed value
8-13 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.00000 to +999999 0.00000 to +999999 RW 0 No.8-11 P.51
Density ► Std density
Standard density
(G) Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Number of decimal places: 2 Number of decimal places: 2
Temperature ► Temperature ►
Standard Std temperature
temperature
8-15 Device root menu ► Device setup ► -INF*2 to +INF*2 -999999 to +999999 RW 0.0 - P.96
Process variables ► ► Pro var ► -32000.0 to +32000.0 0 to 5
Temperature ► Temperature ► -32000.0 to +32000.0
Temp coef A1 Coef A1
IM 01E21A02-02EN
*2 *2
-999999 to +999999 RW 0.0 - P.96
Process variables ► ► Pro var ► -32000.0 to +32000.0 0 to 5
Temperature ► Temperature ► -32000.0 to +32000.0
Temp coef A2 Coef A2
8-17 Device root menu ► Device setup ► -999.99 to +999.99 -999.99 to +999.99 R - No.7-15 P.52
Measured Meas temperature
temperature
8-18 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.0 to 999999 0.0 to 999999 R - No.8-11 P.51
Density ► Correct density
Correct density
8-19 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.0 to +99999.9 0.0 to +99999.9 RW 4184.0 J/kg*K P.98
Calorie ► Specific Specific heat
heat
Calorific fix temp Fixed temperature
8-21 Process variables Device setup ► -INF*2 to +INF*2 -999999 to +999999 R - No.3-18/ P.42
(G) root menu ► Process variables ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: No.3-19
Device variables ► Calorie 0 to 5
Calorific value
Set SIL Set SIL
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.9 Alarm Configuration Parameters

These parameters are related to the alarm output, burnout and history.
9-1 Maintenance root Device setup ► -INF*2 to +INF*2 -999999 to +999999 RW 300.000 Flow velocity P.137
menu ► High/Low Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: No.3-15
alarm configuration H/L alarm cfg ► 0 to 5 Volumetric flow
► High alarm High alarm rate:
No.3-16/
No.3-19
Mass flow rate:
No.3-17/
No.3-19
Flow noise
cm/s
9-2 Maintenance root Device setup ► -INF*2 to +INF*2 -999999 to +999999 RW -300.000 Flow velocity P.137
► Low alarm Low alarm rate:
No.3-16/
No.3-19
Mass flow rate:
No.3-17/
No.3-19
Flow noise
cm/s
9-3 Maintenance root Device setup ► -INF*2 to +INF*2 -999999 to +999999 RW 300.000 Flow velocity P.137
► High high alarm HH alarm rate:
No.3-16/
No.3-19
Mass flow rate:
No.3-17/
No.3-19
Flow noise
cm/s
9-4 Maintenance root Device setup ► -INF*2 to +INF*2 -999999 to +999999 RW -300.000 Flow velocity P.137
► Low low alarm LL alarm rate:
No.3-16/
No.3-19
Mass flow rate:
No.3-17/
No.3-19
Flow noise
cm/s
9-5 Maintenance root Device setup ► 0 to 10 0 to 10 RW 5 % P.137
menu ► High/Low Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 0 Number of decimal
alarm configuration H/L alarm cfg ► places: 0
► Hi/Lo alarm H/L alarm hyst
hysteresis
9-6 Diagnostic root Device setup ► High High R - - P.119
menu ► Status/Self Diag/Service ► Low Low
test ► Burn out H/L alarm cfg ►
4-20 burnout
9-7 Diagnostic root Device setup ► 13: Main board EEPROM default 013:Main EEP dflt RW All Off - P.112
menu ► Status/Self Diag/Service ► on
test ► Alarm ► Sts/Self test ► Alarm
Alarm out mask ► ► Alarm out mask ►
Alarm out mask 1 Mask 1-1
Device setup ► 21: PWM1 stop on 021:PWM 1 stop RW 028:Ind bd FAIL - P.112
Diag/Service ► 22: PWM2 stop on 022:PWM 2 stop
Sts/Self test ► Alarm 23: Option board mismatch on 023:Opt bd mismatch
► Alarm out mask ► 24: Option EEPROM failure on 024:Opt bd EEP FAIL
Mask 1-2 25: Option board A/D failure on 025:Opt bd A/D FAIL
26: Option board SPI failure on 026:Opt bd SPI FAIL
28: Indicator board failure on 028:Ind bd FAIL
29: Ind EEP FAIL on 029:Ind bd EEP FAIL
30: LCD driver failure on 030:LCD drv FAIL
31: Indicator board mismatch on 031:Ind bd mismatch
32: Indicator communication error on 032:Ind comm ERR
33: microSD failure on 033:microSD FAIL
IM 01E21A02-02EN
9-7 Diagnostic root Device setup ► 50: Signal overflow on 050:Signal overflow RW 052:H/L HH/LL alm - P.112
menu ► Status/Self Diag/Service ► 51: Empty pipe detection on 051:Empty detect 053:Adh over lv 4
test ► Alarm ► Sts/Self test ► Alarm 52: H/L HH/LL alarm on 052:H/L HH/LL alm
Alarm out mask ► ► Alarm out mask ► 53: Adhesion over level 4 on 053:Adh over lv 4
Alarm out mask 2 Mask 2-1 60: Span configuration error on 060:Span cfg ERR
61:PV flow configuration error on(G) 061:PV F cfg ERR(G)
62: Analog output 1 4-20 mA limit error on 062:AO 1 4-20 lmt
63: Analog output 2 4-20 mA limit error on(G) 063:AO 2 4-20 lmt(G)
64: Analog output 1 multi range error on 064:AO 1 mlt rng
65: H/L HH/LL configuration error on 065:H/L cfg ERR
66: Density configuration error on 066:Density cfg ERR
Device setup ► 67: Pulse output 1 configuration error on 067:Pls 1 cfg ERR RW 081:AO 2 saturate - P.112
Diag/Service ► 68: Pulse output 2 configuration error on 068:Pls 2 cfg ERR 082:Pls 1 saturate
Sts/Self test ► Alarm 69: Nominal size configuration error on 069:Nomi size cfg 083:Pls 2 saturate
► Alarm out mask ► 70: Adhesion configuration error on 070:Adh cfg ERR 084:AI saturate
Mask 2-2 71: Flow noise config error on(G) 071:FLN cfg ERR(G) 086:Coil insulation
72: Data logging not started on 072:Log not start
80: Analog output 1 saturated on 080:AO 1 saturate
81: Analog output 2 saturated on(G) 081:AO 2 saturate(G)
82: Pulse output 1 saturated on 082:Pls 1 saturate
83: Pulse output 2 saturated on 083:Pls 2 saturate
84: Analog input saturated on(G) 084:AI saturate(G)
85: Cable misconnect on 085:Cable miscon
86: Coil insulation warning on 086:Coil insulation
131: Transmitter type mismatch on 131:Trans mismatch
Diagnostic root Device setup ► 87: Adhesion over level 3 on 087:Adhesion lv 3 RW 087:Adhesion lv 3 - P.112
menu ► Status/Self Diag/Service ► 88: Low conductivity warning on(G) 088:LC warn(G) 088:LC warn
test ► Alarm ► Sts/Self test ► Alarm 89: Insulation detection on(G) 089:Insu detect(G) 089:Insu detect
Alarm out mask ► ► Alarm out mask ► 90: Flow noise over level 3 on(G) 090:FLN over lv 3(G) 090:FLN over lv 3
Alarm out mask 3 Mask 3-1 91: Flow noise over level 4 on(G) 091:FLN over lv 4(G) 091:FLN over lv 4
92: Autozero warning on 092:AZ warn 093:Verif warn
93: Verification warning on 093:Verif warn 094:Fact noise warn
94: Factory noise warning on(G) 094:Fact noise warn(G)
95: Simulation active on 095:Simulate active
96: Analog output 1 fixed on 096:AO 1 fix
97: Analog output 2 fixed on(G) 097:AO 2 fix(G)
98: Pulse output 1 fixed on 098:Pls 1 fix
99: Pulse output 2 fixed on 099:Pls 2 fix
100: Analog input fixed on(G) 100:AI fix(G)
Device setup ► 101: Parameter restore running on 101:Param restore run RW 101:Param restore run - P.112
Diag/Service ► 102: Display over warning on 102:Disp over 102:Disp over
Sts/Self test ► Alarm 103: microSD card size warning on 103:SD size warn 103:SD size warn
► Alarm out mask ► 104: Parameter backup incomplete on 104:Bkup incmplt 105:SD mismatch
Mask 3-2 105: microSD card mismatch on 105:SD mismatch 106:SD removal ERR
106: microSD card removal 106:SD removal ERR 120:Watchdog
error on 120:Watchdog 121:Power off
120: Watchdog on 121:Power off 122:Inst power FAIL
121: Power off on 122:Inst power FAIL 123:Param bkup run
122: Instant power failure on 123:Param bkup run 124:Data log run
123: Parameter backup running on 124:Data log run
124: Data logging running on
Diagnostic root Device setup ► 130: Device ID not entered on 130:DevID not enter RW All Space - P.112
menu ► Status/Self Diag/Service ►
Alarm out mask ► ► Alarm out mask ►
Alarm out mask 4 Mask 4-1
IM 01E21A02-02EN
9-8 Diagnostic root Device setup 13:Main board EEPROM default on 013:Main EEP dflt RW All Space - P.112
menu ► Status/Self ► Diag/Service
test ► Alarm ► ► Sts/Self test
Alarm record mask ► Alarm ►
► Alarm record mask
Alarm record mask 1 ► Mask 1-1
Device setup 21:PWM1 stop on 021:PWM 1 stop RW All Space - P.112
► Diag/Service 22:PWM1 stop on 022:PWM 2 stop
► Sts/Self test 23:Option board mismatch on 023:Opt bd mismatch
► Alarm ► 24:Option EEPROM failure on 024:Opt bd EEP FAIL
Alarm record mask 25:Option board A/D failure on 025:Opt bd A/D FAIL
► Mask 1-2 26:Option board SPI failure on 026:Opt bd SPI FAIL
28:Indicator board failure on 028:Ind bd FAIL
29:Ind EEP FAIL on 029:Ind bd EEP FAIL
30:LCD driver failure on 030:LCD drv FAIL
31:Indicator board mismatch on 031:Ind bd mismatch
32:Indicator communication error on 032:Ind comm ERR
33:microSD failure on 033:microSD FAIL
Diagnostic root Device setup 50: Signal overflow on 050:Signal overflow RW All Space - P.112
menu ► Status/Self ► Diag/Service 51: Empty pipe detection on 051:Empty detect
test ► Alarm ► ► Sts/Self test 52: H/L HH/LL alarm on 052:H/L HH/LL alm
Alarm record mask ► Alarm ► 53: Adhesion over level 4 on 053:Adh over lv 4
Device setup 85: Cable misconnect on 085:Cable miscon RW All Space - P.112
► Diag/Service
► Sts/Self test
► Alarm ►
Alarm record mask
► Mask 2-2
Diagnostic root Device setup 130: Device ID not entered on 130:DevID not enter RW 130:DevID not enter - P.112
menu ► Status/Self ► Diag/Service
test ► Alarm ► ► Sts/Self test
Alarm record mask ► Alarm ►
9-9 Diagnostic root Device setup ► All Space All Space R All Space - P.111
menu ► Status/Self Diag/Service ► 10: Main board CPU failure 010:Main CPU FAIL
test ► Alarm ► Sts/Self test ► Alarm 11: Reverse calculation failure 011:Rev calc FAIL
Alarm record ► ► Alarm record ► 12: Main board EEPROM failure 012:Main EEP FAIL
Alarm record 1 Record alarm 1 13: Main board EEPROM default 013:Main EEP dflt
14: Sensor board failure 014:Snsr bd FAIL
15: Sensor communication error 015:Snsr comm ERR
16: A/D1 failure[Signal] 016:AD 1 FAIL[Sig]
17: A/D2 failure[Exciter] 017:AD 2 FAIL[Excit]
18: Coil open 018:Coil open
19: Coil short 019:Coil short
20: Exciter failure 020:Exciter FAIL
21: PWM1 stop 021:PWM 1 stop
23: Option board mismatch 023:Opt bd mismatch
24: Option board EEPROM failure 024:Opt bd EEP FAIL
25: Option board A/D failure 025:Opt bd A/D FAIL
26: Option board SPI failure 026:Opt bd SPI FAIL
27: Parameter restore incomplete 027:Restore FAIL
28: Indicator board failure 028:Ind bd FAIL
29: Indicator board EEPROM 029:Ind bd EEP FAIL
failure 030:LCD drv FAIL
30: LCD driver failure 031:Ind bd mismatch
31: Indicator board mismatch 032:Ind comm ERR
32: Indicator communication error 033:microSD FAIL
33: microSD failure 050:Signal overflow
50: Signal overflow 051:Empty detect
51: Empty pipe detection 052:H/L HH/LL alm
52: H/L or HH/LL alarm 053:Adh over lv 4
53: Adhesion over level 4 085:Cable miscon
85: Cable misconnect 120:Watchdog
120:Watchdog on 121:Power off
121:Power off on 122:Inst power FAIL
122:Instant power failure on 130:DevID not enter
130:Device ID not entered
9-10 Diagnostic root Device setup ► 00000D 00: 00 to 99999D 23: 59 00000D 00: 00 to 99999D R 00000D 00: 00 - P.111
menu ► Status/Self Diag/Service ► 23: 59
Alarm record ► ► Alarm record ►
Alarm record time 1 Record time 1
IM 01E21A02-02EN
IM 01E21A02-02EN
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.10 Display Configuration Parameters

These parameters are related to display settings.
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup PV PV
Display ► Line select ► Display set ► Velocity Velocity
► Display select1 Line select ► Line 1 Volume flow Volume flow
Mass flow Mass flow
Long tag Long tag
Commun protocol Commun protocol
Adhesion Adhesion
10-2 Device root menu ► Device setup ► None None RW Flow rate(%) - P.121
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Flow rate(%) Flow rate(%)
Display ► Line select ► Display set ► PV PV
► Display select2 Line select ► Line 2 Velocity Velocity
10-3 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Volume flow Volume flow RW Analog out 1 - P.121
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Mass flow Mass flow
Display ► Line select ► Display set ► Flow rate(%Bar) Flow rate(%Bar)
► Display select3 Line select ► Line 3 Calorie(G) Calorie(G)
10-4 Device root menu ► Device setup ► RW None - P.121
Display ► Line select ► Display set ►
► Display select4 Line select ► Line 4
Long tag Long tag
10-5 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Commun protocol Commun protocol RW None - P.121
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Adhesion Adhesion
Display ► Line select ► Display set ► Analog out1 Analog out 1
► Display select5 Line select ► Line 5 Analog out2(G) Analog out 2(G)
10-6 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Flow noise level(G) Flow noise level(G) RW None - P.121
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Totalizer1 count Totalizer 1 count
Display ► Line select ► Display set ► Totalizer2 count Totalizer 2 count
► Display select6 Line select ► Line 6 Totalizer3 count Totalizer 3 count
10-9 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Auto Auto RW Auto 2*4 - P.122
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup 0 digit 0 digit
Display ► ► Display set ► 1 digit 1 digit
Display format ► Disp format ► 2 digit 2 digit
Display format PV Format PV 3 digit 3 digit
4 digit 4 digit
5 digit 5 digit
Auto 2 Auto 2
10-10 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Auto Auto RW Auto - P.122
Display format total 1 Format total 1 3 digit 3 digit
10-11 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 4 digit 4 digit RW
Display format total 2 Format total 2
10-12 Device root menu ► Device setup ► RW
Display ► ► Display set ►
Display format ► Disp format ►
Display format total 3 Format total 3
*3: When Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) is R2.01.01 or earlier, the default value is Manual.
*4: When Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) is R2.01.01 or earlier, the default value is "Auto".
IM 01E21A02-02EN
10-13 Device root menu ► Device setup ► -5 -5 RW 0 - P.128
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup -4 -4
Display ► ► Display set ► -3 -3
Display operation Optional config ► -2 -2
configuration ► Contrast -1 -1
Display contrast 0 0
+1 1
+2 2
+3 3
+4 4
+5 5
10-14 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 1 Line(Big) 1 line(big) RW 3 line - P.124
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup 1 Line 1 line
Display ► ► Display set ► 2 Line 2 line
Display operation Optional config ► 3 Line 3 line
configuration ► Line mode 4 Line 4 line
Display line
10-15 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.2 s 0.2 s RW 0.4 s - P.127
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup 0.4 s 0.4 s
Display ► ► Display set ► 1.0 s 1.0 s
Display operation Optional config ► 2.0 s 2.0 s
configuration ► Period 4.0 s 4.0 s
Display period 8.0 s 8.0 s
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup NE107 NE107
Display operation Optional config ►
configuration ► NE107 display
Display NE107
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Detail Detail
configuration ► Alarm display
Display alarm
10-18 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Off Off RW Off*3 - P.124
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Manual Manual
Display ► ► Display set ► Auto(2 s) Auto(2 s)
Display operation Optional config ► Auto(4 s) Auto(4 s)
configuration ► Scroll mode Auto(8 s) Auto(8 s)
Display scroll
10-19 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 0.0 to 200.0 0.0 to 200.0 RW 0.0 s P.128
configuration ► Damp
Display damping
10-20 Device root menu ► Device setup ► MM/DD/YYYY MM/DD/YYYY RW MM/DD/YYYY - P.128
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup DD/MM/YYYY DD/MM/YYYY
Display ► ► Display set ► YYYY/MM/DD YYYY/MM/DD
configuration ► Format date
Display format date
10-21 Device root menu ► Device setup ► English English RW English - P.120
Detailed setup ► Language French French
Display ► German German
Display operation Italian Italian
configuration ► Spanish Spanish
Language Portuguese Portuguese
Russian Russian
Chinese Chinese
Japanese Japanese
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Trend Trend
configuration ► Display mode
Display measure
mode
10-23 Device root menu ► Device setup ► -INF*2 to +INF*2 -999999 to +999999 RW 0.0 - P.127
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: 0 to 5
configuration ► Trend offln LRV
Trend offline lrv
IM 01E21A02-02EN
*2 *2
-999999 to +999999 RW 10.0 - P.127
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: 0 to 5
configuration ► Trend offln URV
Trend offline urv
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup PV PV
Display ► ► Display set ► Velocity Velocity
Trend select ► Trend select ► Volume flow Volume flow
Trend select 1 Trend 1 Mass flow Mass flow
10-26 Device root menu ► Device setup ► None None RW None - P.126
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Flow rate(%) Flow rate(%)
Display ► ► Display set ► PV PV
Trend select ► Trend select ► Velocity Velocity
Trend select 2 Trend 2 Volume flow Volume flow
10-27 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Mass flow Mass flow RW None - P.126
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Calorie(G) Calorie(G)
Display ► ► Display set ► Analog out1 Analog out 1
Trend select ► Trend select ► Analog out2(G) Analog out 2(G)
Trend select 3 Trend 3 Totalizer1 Totalizer 1
Trend select ► Trend select ►
Trend select 4 Trend 4
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Invert Invert
configuration ► Inversion
Display inversion
10-30 Maintenance root Device setup ► Not execute Not execute RW Not execute - -
menu ► Display Diag/Service ► Execute Execute
indication ► LCD Disp indicator ► Show Pattern1 Show pattern 1
test LCD test Show Pattern2 Show pattern 2
Show Pattern3 Show pattern 3
Show Pattern4 Show pattern 4
10-31 Maintenance root Device setup ► Off Off RW Off - P.129
menu ► Display Diag/Service ► On On
indication ► Squawk Disp indicator ► Squawk Once Squawk once
Squawk
10-32 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Package 1 Pack 1 R - *1 - P.120
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Package 2 Pack 2
configuration ► Language package
Language package
10-33 Device root menu ► Device setup ► No disp No disp RW With disp *1 - -
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup With disp With disp
Display ► ► Device info
Display operation ► Order info ►
configuration ► Disp install
Display installation
10-34 Device root menu ► - Disable - RW Enable - P.129
Detailed setup ► Enable
Display ►
Display operation
configuration ►
IRSW operation
10-35 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Current time Current time RW Operation days - P.130
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Operation days Operation days
Display ► ► Display set ► Off Off
configuration ► Time display
Display time
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.11 Device Information Configuration

Parameters
These parameters are related to the device information.
11-1 Device root menu ► Device setup ► ASCII 8 characters ASCII 8 characters RW All Space *1
- P.133
Device information ► ► Device info ►
Order information Order info ► Tag No
► Tag
Device root menu ► Device setup ► ASCII 32 characters ASCII 32 characters RW All Space *1 - P.133
Device information ► ► Device info
Order information ► ► Order info ►
Long tag Long tag
11-2 Maintenance root Device setup ► 00000D 00: 00 to 99999D 23: 59 00000D 00: 00 to 99999D 23: 59 R 00000D 00: 00 - P.136
menu ► Time stamp Detailed setup
► Operation time ► Device info
► Date/Time ►
Operation time
11-3 Maintenance root Device setup ► 01/01/1900 to 12/31/2155 01/01/1900 to 12/31/2155 R 1900/01/01 - P.135
► Current Date ► Device info
► Date/Time ►
Current date
11-4 Maintenance root Device setup ► 00: 00: 00 to 23: 59: 59 00: 00: 00 to 23: 59: 59 R 00: 00: 00 - P.135
► Current Time ► Device info
► Date/Time ►
Current time
11-5 - Device setup ► - 01/01/1900 to 12/31/2155 RW 01/01/1900 - P.135
Detailed setup
► Device info
► Date/Time ►
Set date
- Device setup ► - 00: 00: 00 to 23: 59: 59 RW 00: 00: 00 - P.135
Detailed setup
► Device info
► Date/Time ►
Set time
Maintenance root - 01/01/1900 00: 00: 00 - RW 01/01/1900 00: - P.135
menu ► Time stamp to 00: 00
► Set Date/Time 12/31/2155 23: 59: 59
11-6 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Non None R - - P.134
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup 1A Type 1A type
Version/Number Ver/Num info ►
information ► Transmitter type
Transmitter type
11-7 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Non None R - - P.134
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Multi Multi
information ► Option board ID
Option board ID
11-8 Device root menu ► Device setup ► 1 mm 1 mm RW 3 mm - P.148
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup 3 mm 3 mm
Device information ► ► Device info 8 mm 8 mm
Order information ► ► Order info ► 10 mm 10 mm
Electrode size Electrode size 6 mm 6 mm
11-9 Device root menu ► Device setup ► ASCII 16 characters ASCII 16 characters RW All Space *1 - P.133
Order information ► ► Order info
Basic model code ► MS code ►
Model code
*4: Set at the factory before shipment.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
11-10 Device root menu ► Device setup ► ASCII 16 characters ASCII 16 characters RW All Space *1
- P.133
Suffix config 1 ► MS code ►
Suffix config 1
Suffix config 2 ► MS code ►
Suffix config 2
Option 1 MS code ► Option 1
Remote sensor basic RS MS code ►
model code Model code
Remote sensor suffix RS MS code ►
config 1 Suffix config 1
Remote sensor suffix RS MS code ►
config 2 Suffix config 2
Order information ► Order info ►
► Remote sensor RS MS code ►
option 1 Option 1
option 2 Option 2
option 3 Option 3
option 4 Option 4
IM 01E21A02-02EN
information ► Trans serial No
Transmitter serial No
information ► Sensor serial No
Sensor serial No
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup ►
Device information ► Device info ► Memo
Memo ► Memo 1 ► Memo 1
Device root menu ► Device setup ► ASCII 16 characters ASCII 16 characters RW All Space - P.135
Device root menu ► Device setup ► ASCII 16 characters ASCII 16 characters RW All Space - P.135
11-18 Device root menu ► Device setup ► R2.01.01*4 R2.01.01*4 R - - P.134
information ► Main soft rev
Main board revision
information ► Snsr soft rev
Sensor board
revision
information ► Ind soft rev
Indicator board
revision
11-21 Device root menu ► Device setup ► No/Yes No/Yes RW No - P.136
Explosion protection Explosion protection
11-22 Device root menu ► Device setup ► AO1 Act AO1 Act R *1 - -
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup AO1 Pas AO1 Pas
IO Status ► IO1 IO status ► I/O 1
Device root menu ► Device setup ► PLS/SO1 Pas PLS/SO1 Pas R *1 - -
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup NM1 PLS/SO1 Pas(NAMUR)
IO Status ► IO2 IO status ► I/O 2
Device root menu ► Device setup ► NAN None R *1 - -
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup AO2 Pas AO2 Pas
Device information ► ► Device info ► PLS/SO2 Pas PLS/SO2 Pas
IO Status ► IO3 IO status ► I/O 3 SO3 Pas SO3 Pas
SI3 V-Free SI3 V-Free
Device root menu ► Device setup ► NAN None R *1 - -
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup AO2 Act AO2 Act
Device information ► ► Device info ► AI Act AI Act
IO Status ► IO4 IO status ► I/O 4 PLS/SO2 Pas PLS/SO2 Pas
PLS/SO2 Act1 PLS/SO2 Act1
PLS/SO2 Act2/3 PLS/SO2 Act2/3
NM2 PLS/SO2 Pas(NAMUR)
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.12 Diagnosis Function Configuration

Parameters
These parameters are related to the electrode adhesion detection, flow noise diagnosis, and
verification function settings.
12-1 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup Disable Disable RW Enable - P.139
► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service Enable Enable
Adhesion ► ► Diagnosis ►
Adhesion function Adhesion ► Function
12-2 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup 0.00 to +100.00 0.00 to +100.00 RW 0.10 M ohm P.139
► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service Number of decimal places: 2 Number of decimal places: 2
Adhesion ► ► Diagnosis
Adhesion level 1 ► Adhesion ►
Threshold level 1
Threshold level 2
Threshold level 3
Threshold level 4
12-6 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup 0.00000 to +1000.0 0.00000 to +1000.0 R - M ohm P.139
► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: 0 to 5
Adhesion ► Result ► Diagnosis ►
► Adhesion ► Result
Adhesion value ► Value
12-7 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup Level0 Level 0 R - - P.139
► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service Level1 Level 1
Adhesion ► Result ► Diagnosis ► Level2 Level 2
► Adhesion status Adhesion ► Result Level3 Level 3
► Status Level4 Level 4
12-8 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup 0.5 min 0.5 min RW 2 min - P.139
► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service 1 min 1 min
Adhesion ► ► Diagnosis 2 min 2 min
Adhesion check ► Adhesion ► 10 min 10 min
cycle Check cycle
12-9 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup Disable Disable RW Disable - P.147
(G) ► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service Enable Enable
Flow noise ► ► Diagnosis ►
Flow noise function Flow noise ►
Function
12-10 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup 0.0 to +999.9 0.0 to +999.9 RW 5.0 cm/s P.147
(G) ► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service Number of decimal places: 1 Number of decimal places: 1
Flow noise level 1 Flow noise ►
Threshold level 1
Threshold level 2
Threshold level 3
Threshold level 4
12-14 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup 0.00000 to +100.00 0.00000 to +100.00 R - cm/s P.147
(G) ► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: 0 to 5
Flow noise ► Result ► Diagnosis ►
► Flow noise Flow noise ► Result
► Value
IM 01E21A02-02EN
12-15 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup Level0 Level 0 R - - P.147
(G) ► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service Level1 Level 1
Flow noise ► ► Diagnosis ► Level2 Level 2
Result ► Flow noise ► Result Level3 Level 3
Flow noise status ► Status Level4 Level 4
12-16 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup 0.1 to 500.0 0.1 to 500.0 RW 3.0 s P.46
Flow noise damping Flow noise ► Damp
12-17 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup 0.1 to 999.9 0.1 to 999.9 RW 150.0 cm/s P.44
Flow noise span Flow noise ► Span
12-18 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup Disable Disable RW Disable - P.148
(G) ► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service Enable Enable
Conductivity ► ► Diagnosis ►
Low conductivity Conductivity ►
function Function
12-19 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup 0.00000 to +INF*2 0.00000 to 999999 R - mS/cm P.148
(G) ► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: 0 to 5
Result ► Conductivity ►
Conductivity value Result ► Value
12-20 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup 0.0000 to 99.9999 0.0000 to 99.9999 RW 0.0010 mS/cm P.148
Conductivity low limit Conductivity ►
Low limit
12-21 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup Not execute Not execute RW Not execute - P.141
► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service Elec ins exe Electrode insul exe P.146
Diagnostic Exe ► Diagnosis ► Conn chk exe Connect check exe
Diagnostic execute
12-22 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 100.0 RW 25.0 % P.149
Coil insulation ► Diagnosis ►
threshold Coil insul threshold
12-23 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9 R 260.0 mA P.149
IEX compare ► Diagnosis ►
IEX compare
12-24 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup 0.000 to 3.000 0.000 to 3.000 R - V P.149
V peak hold value ► Diagnosis ►
V peak hold
12-25 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup 0 to +9999.9 0 to +9999.9 R - ohm P.149
IEX coil resistance ► Diagnosis ►
IEX resistance
12-26 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup -3.00 to 3.00 -3.00 to 3.00 R - V P.140
Empty ► ► Diagnosis ►
Electrode voltage A Empty check ►
Electrode voltage A
12-27 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup -3.00 to +3.00 -3.00 to +3.00 R - V P.140
Empty ► ► Diagnosis ►
Electrode voltage B Empty check ►
Electrode voltage B
12-28 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup Full Full R - - P.140
► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service Empty Empty
Empty ► Result ► ► Diagnosis ►
Empty status Empty check ►
Empty status
12-29 Diagnostic rootmenu Device setup Zero Zero RW Zero - P.141
► Diagnosis ► ► Diag/Service Measured value Measured value P.142
Diagnostic output ► Diagnosis ► Hold Hold P.146
Diagnostic output
12-30 Maintenance root Device setup ► Magnetic Magnetic circuit RW - P.142
menu ► Verification Diag/Service ► Excitation Excite circuit
► VF target select Verification ► Calculation Calc circuit
VF target select Device status Device status
Conn status Connect status
12-31 Maintenance root Device setup ► No flow No flow RW No flow - P.142
menu ► Verification Diag/Service ► Flow Flow
► VF mode Verification ► Mode
menu ► Verification Diag/Service ► Execute Execute
► Verification Exe Verification ►
Execute
IM 01E21A02-02EN
12-33 Maintenance root Device setup ► Factory Factory RW Factory - P.142
menu ► Verification Diag/Service ► Previous Previous
► VF No Verification ► VF No Present Present
12-34 Maintenance root Device setup ► Passed Passed R No data - P.142
menu ► Verification Diag/Service ► Failed Failed
► Result ► VF Verification ► Result Canceled Canceled
check result ► Failed/Passed No Data No data
Unknown Unknown
12-35 Maintenance root Device setup ► 00000D 00: 00 to 99999D 23: 59 00000D 00: 00 to 99999D 23: 59 R 00000D 00: 00 - P.142
menu ► Verification Diag/Service ►
► Result ► VF Verification ► Result
operation time ► VF operate time
menu ► Diag/Service ► Failed Failed
Verification ► Result Verification ► Result Canceled Canceled
► Magnetic circuit ► Magnetic circuit No Data No data
result Unknown Unknown
Skip Skip
► Excitation circuit ► Excite circuit No Data No data
Skip Skip
► Result ► Verification ► Result Canceled Canceled
Calculation circuit ► Calc circuit No Data No data
Skip Skip
► VF device status ► Device status No Data No data
Skip Skip
► Result ► Verification ► Result Canceled Canceled
Connection status ► Connect status No Data No data
Skip Skip
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.13 Test Mode Configuration Parameters

These parameters are related to test mode settings.
13-1 Maintenance root Device setup ► 10 min 10 min RW 30 min*3 - P.152
menu ► Test ► Diag/Service ► Test 30 min 30 min
Release time ► Release time 1h 1h
3h 3h
12 h 12 h
13-2 Maintenance root - Velocity test on - RW All Space - P.150
menu ► Test ► Volume flow test on
Test mode Mass flow test on
Calorific value test on(G)
AO1 test on
Pulse1 test on
SO1 test on
AO2 test on(G)
Pulse2 test on
SO2 test on
AI test on(G)
SO3 test on
SI3 test on
- Device setup ► - Velocity test RW - - P.150
Diag/Service ► Volume test
Test ► Input test ► Mass test
Test mode Calorie test(G)
AI test(G)
SI3 test
- Device setup ► - AO1 test RW - - P.150
Diag/Service ► Test PO1 test
► Output test ► SO1 test
Test mode AO2 test(G)
PO2 test
SO2 test
SO3 test
13-3 Maintenance root Device setup ► -INF*2 to +INF*2 -999999 to +999999 RW 0.0 No.3-15 P.151
menu ► Test ► Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: 0 to 5
Input test ► Velocity Test ► Input test ►
Velocity
13-4 Maintenance root Device setup ► -INF*2 to +INF*2 -999999 to +999999 RW 0.0 No.3-16/ P.151
menu ► Test ► Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 No.3-19
Input test ► Volume Test ► Input test ►
flow Volume
menu ► Test ► Diag/Service ► Test Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 No.3-19
Input test ► Mass ► Input test ► Mass
flow
menu ► Test ► Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 Number of decimal places: 0 to 5 No.3-19
Input test ► Calorific Test ► Input test ►
value Calorie
13-7 Maintenance root Device setup ► Open Open RW Open - P.151
menu ► Test ► Diag/Service ► Test Short Short
Input test ► SI3 ► Input test ► SI3
menu ► Test ► Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
Output test ► AO1 Test ► Output test
► AO1
13-9 Maintenance root Device setup ► 0 to 12500 0 to 12500 RW 0.0 pps (pulse/s) P.151
Output test ► Pulse1 Test ► Output test
► PO1
menu ► Test ► Diag/Service ► Close Close
Output test ► SO1 Test ► Output test
► SO1
(G) menu ► Test ► Diag/Service ► Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
Output test ► AO2 Test ► Output test
► AO2
13-12 Maintenance root Device setup ► 0 to 12500 0 to 12500 RW 0 pps (pulse/s) P.151
Output test ► Pulse2 Test ► Output test
► PO2
► SO2
*3: When Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) is R2.01.01 or earlier, the default value is "10 min".
IM 01E21A02-02EN
► SO3
(G) menu ► Test ► Diag/Service ► Test Number of decimal places: 3 Number of decimal places: 3
Input test ► AI ► Input test ► AI
13-16 Maintenance root Device setup ► Normal Normal RW Normal - P.152
menu ► Test ► Test Diag/Service ► Test Test Test
2 mode ► Test 2 mode
13-17 Maintenance root Device setup ► -10.0 to 110.0 -10.0 to 110.0 RW 0.0 % P.152
menu ► Test ► Test Diag/Service ► Test
2 output value ► Test 2 value
*3: When Main soft rev (Main board revision/Main soft rev) is R2.01.01 or earlier, the default value is "10 min".
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.14 Backup/Restore/Data Logging Configuration

Parameters
These parameters are related to the backup function, restore function and data logging function
of parameters.
14-1 Maintenance root Device setup ► ASCII 16 characters ASCII 16 characters R Factory - P.153
menu ► Diag/Service ► Delivery
Param bkup/restore Param bkup/restore
► Factory backup ► F backup name
name
14-2 Maintenance root Device setup ► ASCII 16 characters ASCII 16 characters R 01/01/2019 *4 - P.153
menu ► Diag/Service ►
► Factory backup ► F backup date
date
14-3 Maintenance root Device setup ► ASCII 8 characters ASCII 8 characters RW SD_FILE - P.153
► SD backup name ► SD backup name
14-4 Maintenance root Device setup ► ASCII 16 characters ASCII 16 characters RW Backup 1 - P.153
► Backup name 1 ► Backup name 1
14-5 Maintenance root Device setup ► ASCII 16 characters ASCII 16 characters RW 01/01/2019 - P.153
► Backup date 1 ► Backup date 1
menu ► Diag/Service ► Store Main to 1 Store main to 1
Param bkup/restore Param bkup/restore Store Main to 2 Store main to 2
► Backup Exe ► Backup execute Store Main to 3 Store main to 3
Store Main to SD Store main to SD
14-11 Device setup ► Unexecuted Unexecuted R Unexecuted - P.153
Diag/Service ► Success Success
Param bkup/restore Failure Failure
► Backup result Running Running
menu ► Diag/Service ► Duplicate Data 1 Duplicate data 1
Param bkup/restore Param bkup/restore Duplicate Data 2 Duplicate data 2
► Restore Exe ► Restore execute Duplicate Data 3 Duplicate data 3
Duplicate SD Duplicate SD
Restore Data 1 Restore data 1
Restore SD Restore SD
Compulsion Data 1 Compulsion data 1
Compulsion SD Compulsion SD
Restore Factory Restore factory
14-13 Device setup ► Unexecuted Unexecuted R Unexecuted - P.156
Diag/Service ► Success Success
Param bkup/restore Failure Failure
► Restore result Running Running
IM 01E21A02-02EN
14-14 Maintenance root Device setup ASCII 8 characters ASCII 8 characters RW LOG_FILE - P.164
menu ► ► Diag/Service
Data logging ► ► Data log ►
File name File name
14-15 Maintenance root Device setup 1s 1s RW 1 min - P.164
menu ► ► Diag/Service 10 s 10 s
Data logging ► ► Data log ► 30 s 30 s
Interval time Interval time 1 min 1 min
5 min 5 min
30 min 30 min
1h 1h
14-16 Maintenance root Device setup ► 01/01/1900 to 31/12/2155 01/01/1900 to 31/12/2155 R 01/01/2019 - P.164
Data logging ► Data log ► Start date
Start date
14-17 Maintenance root Device setup ► 00: 00: 00 to 23: 59: 59 00: 00: 00 to 23: 59: 59 R 00:00:00 - P.164
Data logging ► Data log ► Start time
Start time
14-18 Maintenance root Device setup ► 10 min 10 min RW 12 h - P.164
menu ► Diag/Service ► 30 min 30 min
Data logging ► Data log ► End time 1h 1h
End time 3h 3h
12 h 12 h
24 h 24 h
72 h 72 h
240 h 240 h
720 h 720 h
1440 h 1440 h
14-19 Maintenance root Device setup ► Velocity Velocity RW PV - P.164
menu ► Diag/Service ► Volume flow Volume flow
Data logging ► Data log ► Log 1 Mass flow Mass flow
Log1 select Calorie(G) Calorie(G)
14-20 Maintenance root Device setup ► PV PV RW Velocity - P.164
menu ► Diag/Service ► Flow noise(G) Flow noise(G)
Data logging ► Data log ► Log 2 Adhesion Adhesion
Log2 select Electrode A Electrode A
Electrode B Electrode B
14-21 Maintenance root Device setup ► RW Volume flow - P.164
V peak(G) V peak(G)
Data logging ► Data log ► Log 3
Log3 select
14-22 Maintenance root Device setup ► RW Mass flow - P.164
Data logging ► Data log ► Log 4
Log4 select
menu ► Diag/Service ► Execute Execute
Data logging ► Data log ► Execute
Logging Exe
IM 01E21A02-02EN
5.15 Parameter Protection Parameters

These parameters are related to the write protect function.
15-1 - Device setup ► 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 RW 0000 - P.168
Detailed setup Number of decimal places: 0 Number of decimal places: 0
► Protection ►
Key code
15-2 Device root menu ► Device setup ► No No R No - P.167
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Yes Yes
Protection ► ► Protection ►
Write protect Write protect sts
Enable write 10 min Enable write
New password New password
15-5 Device root menu ► Device setup ► Keep Keep R Keep - P.167
Detailed setup ► Detailed setup Break Break
Software seal Soft seal status
IM 01E21A02-02EN
<6. Parameter Menu Tree> 209
6. Parameter Menu Tree

NOTE
The available menus and parameters vary depending on communication and I/O code and the
optional codes specified at the time of ordering.
6.1 Display Menu Tree

The outline of the display menu structure is shown below.
Operation level
Exit R ead only
R
Operator R/W1 Read and write possible
Maintenance R/W2 Read always possible,
Writing limited to the following operation levels
Specialist
(Operation level: Maintenance, Specialist)
R/W3 Read always possible,
Writing limited to the following operation levels
(Operation level: Specialist)
Symbol(G) Only available for AXG, not for AXW
Device setup
Current alarm → Page 210 Easy setup wizard → Page 217
Volume
Language R/W1 Pulse/Status out
Display set
Process variables → Page 211 Autozero exe
Flow rate(%)
Flow rate Detailed setup → Page 218
Velocity Pro var
Volume Sensor
Mass User Span
Calorie(G) Totalizer
Analog out 1 Pulse/Status out
Analog out 2(G) Status in
Totalizer Analog out/in
Multi range
Diag/Service → Page 212 AUX calculation
Sts/Self test Display set
Time stamp Access cfg
Diagnosis Device info
Verification Protection
Autozero
AO/AI trim microSD → Page 225
H/L alarm cfg Contents
Test Unmount
Param bkup/restore Format
Data log Property
Disp indicator
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Current alarm
Current alarm
Setting upload
Status 0 R
Status 1 R
Status 2 R
Status 3 R
Status 4 R
Status 5 R
Status 14 R
Status 15 R
Status 16 R
Status 17 R
Status 18 R
Status 19 R
Status 20 R
Setting download
Status 0 Status 1 Status 2 Status 3

010:Main CPU FAIL 014:Snsr bd FAIL 021:PWM 1 stop 027:Restore FAIL
011:Rev calc FAIL 015:Snsr comm ERR 022:PWM 2 stop 028:Ind bd FAIL
012:Main EEP FAIL 016:AD 1 FAIL[Sig] 023:Opt bd mismatch 029:Ind bd EEP FAIL
013:Main EEP dflt 017:AD 2 FAIL[Excit] 024:Opt bd EEP FAIL 030:LCD drv FAIL
018:Coil open 025:Opt bd A/D FAIL 031:Ind bd mismatch
019:Coil short 026:Opt bd SPI FAIL 032:Ind comm ERR
020:Exciter FAIL 033:microSD FAIL

050:Signal overflow 060:Span cfg ERR 067:Pls 1 cfg ERR 080:AO 1 saturate
051:Empty detect 061:PV F cfg ERR 068:Pls 2 cfg ERR 081:AO 2 saturate
052:H/L HH/LL alm 062:AO 1 4-20 lmt 069:Nomi size cfg 082:Pls 1 saturate
053:Adh over lv 4 063:AO 2 4-20 lmt 070:Adh cfg ERR 083:Pls 2 saturate
064:AO 1 mlt rng 071:FLN cfg ERR 084:AI saturate
065:H/L cfg ERR 072:Log not start 085:Cable miscon
066:Density cfg ERR 086:Coil insulation
131:Trans mismatch

087:Adhesion lv 3 095:Simulate active 101:Param restore run 120:Watchdog
088:LC warn 096:AO 1 fix 102:Disp over 121:Power off
089:Insu detect 097:AO 2 fix 103:SD size warn 122:Inst power FAIL
090:FLN over lv 3 098:Pls 1 fix 104:Bkup incmplt 123:Param bkup run
091:FLN over lv 4 099:Pls 2 fix 105:SD mismatch 124:Data log run
092:AZ warn 100:AI fix 106:SD removal ERR
093:Verif warn
094:Fact noise warn
Status 20
130:DevID not enter
NOTE
Only the status items that occur in HART communication type are described above. Other than
the above status items are also displayed on the display unit.
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Process variables
Process variables
Flow rate(%) R
Flow rate R
Velocity R
Volume R
Mass R
Calorie(G) R
Analog out 1 R
Analog out 2(G) R
Totalizer
Totalizer 1 R
Totalizer 2 R
Totalizer 3 R
Totalizer 1 count R
Totalizer 2 count R
Totalizer 3 count R
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Diagnosis/Service
Diag/Service
Sts/Self test → Page 213
Time stamp
Date R
Time R
Op time R
Diagnosis → Page 214
Verification → Page 215
Autozero
Execute R/W2
Result
Zero value R/W3
AO/AI trim → Page 215
H/L alarm cfg

High alarm R/W3
Low alarm R/W3
HH alarm R/W3
LL alarm R/W3
H/L alarm hyst R/W3
4-20 burnout R
Test → Page 216
Param bkup/restore
F backup name R
F backup date R
SD backup name R/W3
Backup execute R/W3
Backup result R
Restore execute R/W3
Restore result R
Backup name 1 R/W3
Backup date 1 R/W3
Backup name 2 R/W3
Backup date 2 R/W3
Backup name 3 R/W3
Backup date 3 R/W3
Data log
File name R/W3
Interval time R/W3
Start date R
Start time R
End time R/W3
Execute R/W3
Log 1 R/W3
Log 2 R/W3
Log 3 R/W3
Log 4 R/W3
Disp indicator
LCD test R/W1
Squawk R/W1
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Status/Self test
Sts/Self test
Current alarm
Status 0 R
Status 1 R
Status 2 R
Status 3 R
Status 4 R
Status 5 R
Status 14 R
Status 15 R
Status 16 R
Status 17 R
Status 18 R
Status 19 R
Status 20 R
Alarm
Alarm record mask
Mask 1-1 R/W3
Mask 1-2 R/W3
Mask 2-1 R/W3
Mask 2-2 R/W3
Mask 3-1 R/W3
Alarm record
Record alarm 1 R
Record time 1 R
Record alarm 2 R
Record time 2 R
Record alarm 3 R
Record time 3 R
Record alarm 4 R
Record time 4 R
Alarm out mask

Mask 1-1 R/W3
Mask 1-2 R/W3
Mask 2-1 R/W3
Mask 2-2 R/W3
Mask 3-1 R/W3
Mask 3-2 R/W3
Mask 4-1 R/W3
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Adhesion
Function R/W3
Threshold level 1 R/W3
Result
Value R
Status R
Check cycle R/W3
Flow noise(G)
Function R/W3
Result
Value R
Status R
Damp R/W3
Span R/W3
Conductivity(G)
Function R/W3
Low limit R/W3
Result
Value R
Diagnostic execute R/W3

Coil insul threshold R/W3
IEX compare R
Diagnostic output R/W3
V peak hold(G) R
IEX resistance R
Empty check
Electrode voltage A R
Electrode voltage B R
Empty status R
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Verification
Verification
Mode R/W3
Execute R/W3
VF No R/W3
VF target select R/W3
Result
Failed/Passed R
VF operate time R
Magnetic circuit R
Excite circuit R
Calc circuit R
Device status R
Connect status R
z Analog output/input adjustment

AO/AI trim
AO trim
AO1 trim clear R/W3
AO1 trim 4mA R/W3
AO1 trim 20mA R/W3
AO2 trim clear(G) R/W3
AO2 trim 4mA(G) R/W3
AO2 trim 20mA(G) R/W3
AI trim(G)
Trim clear R/W3
Trim 4mA R/W3
Trim 20mA R/W3
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Test
Test
Release time R/W3
Input test
Test mode R/W3
Velocity R/W3
Volume R/W3
Mass R/W3
Calorie(G) R/W3
AI(G) R/W3
SI3 R/W3
Output test
Test mode R/W3
AO1 R/W3
PO1 R/W3
SO1 R/W3
AO2(G) R/W3
PO2 R/W3
SO2 R/W3
SO3 R/W3
Test 2 mode R/W3

Test 2 value R/W3
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Easy setup wizard

Easy setup wizard
Volume
Setting upload
Damp AO/F R/W2
Damp pls/ttl R/W2
Unit R/W2
Time unit R/W2
Span R/W2
Setting download
Pulse/Status out
Setting upload
P1 unit R/W2
P1 val R/W2
F1 at 0% R/W2
F1 at 100% R/W2
Setting download
Display set
Setting upload
Line 1 R/W1
Line 2 R/W1
Line 3 R/W1
Setting download
Autozero exe R/W2
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Detailed setup
Detailed setup
Pro var → Page 219
Sensor
Low MF R/W3
High MF R/W3
Flow sensor sel R/W3
Nominal size unit R/W3
Nominal size R/W3
User Span → Page 219
Totalizer → Page 220
Pulse/Status out → Page 221
Status in → Page 222
Analog out/in → Page 222
Multi range
Forward span 2 R/W3
Reverse span 1 R/W3
Reverse span 2 R/W3
Auto range hyst R/W3
Bi direction hyst R/W3
AUX calculation
Flow direct R/W3
Rate limit R/W3
Dead time R/W3
Noise filter R/W3
Pulsing flow R/W3
Power sync R/W3
Set power freq R/W3
Iex power frequency R
Meas power freq R
Set SIL R/W3
Display set → Page 223
Access cfg
User role R
Chg mainte R/W2
Chg special R/W3
Device info → Page 224
Protection
Key code R/W3
Write protect sts R
Enable write R/W3
New password R/W3
Soft seal status R
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Process variables
Pro var
PV flow select R/W3
Velocity Calorie(G)
Damp AO/F R/W3 Damp AO/F R/W3
Damp pls/ttl R/W3 Damp pls/ttl R/W3
Unit R/W3 Unit R/W3
Span R/W3 Time unit R/W2
Span R/W3
Volume Specific heat R/W3
Damp AO/F R/W2
Damp pls/ttl R/W2 Density
Unit R/W2 Value select(G) R/W3
Time unit R/W2 Unit R/W3
Span R/W2 Fixed density R/W3
Std density(G) R/W3
Mass Correct density(G) R
Damp AO/F R/W3
Damp pls/ttl R/W3 Temperature(G)
Unit R/W3 Std temperature R/W3
Time unit R/W2 Meas temperature R
Span R/W3 Fixed temperature R/W3
Coef A1 R/W3
Coef A2 R/W3
Velocity check R
z User span
User Span
User span AO1
Select R/W3
Span R/W3
Unit R/W3
User span AO2(G)

Select R/W3
Span R/W3
Unit R/W3
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Totalizer
Totalizer
Totalizer 1
Unit R
Conv factor R/W3
Low cut R/W3
Failure opts R/W3
Options R/W3
Start/Stop R/W3
Reset/Preset R/W3
Preset value R/W3
Set point R/W3
Count unit R/W3
Totalizer 2
Unit R/W3
Conv factor R/W3
Low cut R/W3
Failure opts R/W3
Options R/W3
Start/Stop R/W3
Reset/Preset R/W3
Preset value R/W3
Set point R/W3
Count unit R/W3
Totalizer 3
Unit R/W3
Conv factor R/W3
Low cut R/W3
Failure opts R/W3
Options R/W3
Start/Stop R/W3
Reset/Preset R/W3
Preset value R/W3
Set point R/W3
Count unit R/W3
Reset mode R/W3
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Pulse/Status output
Pulse/Status out
PO1/SO1
Output mode R/W3
Active mode R/W3
Fix width R/W3
Rate unit R/W2
Rate value R/W2
Low cut R/W3
Alarm out R/W3
Frequency at 0% R/W2
SO1 function R/W3
Options R/W3
PO2/SO2
Active pulse R/W3
Output mode R/W3
Pulse select R/W3
Active mode R/W3
Fix width R/W3
Rate unit R/W3
Rate value R/W3
Low cut R/W3
Alarm out R/W3
SO2 function R/W3
Options R/W3
SO3
Active mode R/W3
Function R/W3
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Status input
Status in
SI3
Active mode R/W3
Function R/W3
State R
z Analog output/input
Analog out/in
AO1
Low cut R/W3
High limit R/W3
Low limit R/W3
Alarm out R/W3
Range mode R/W3
AO2(G)
AO2 select R/W3
Low cut R/W3
High limit R/W3
Low limit R/W3
Alarm out R/W3
AI(G)
Function R/W3
High limit R/W3
Low limit R/W3
Value R
Unit R/W3
URV R/W3
LRV R/W3
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Display set
Display set
Line select
Line 1 R/W1
Line 2 R/W1
Line 3 R/W1
Line 4 R/W1
Line 5 R/W1
Line 6 R/W1
Line 7 R/W1
Line 8 R/W1
Trend select
Trend 1 R/W1
Trend 2 R/W1
Trend 3 R/W1
Trend 4 R/W1
Disp format
Format PV R/W1
Format total 1 R/W1
Format total 2 R/W1
Format total 3 R/W1
Optional config
Contrast R/W1
Line mode R/W1
Period R/W1
NE107 display R/W1
Alarm display R/W1
Scroll mode R/W1
Damp R/W1
Format date R/W1
Inversion R/W1
Language package R
Display mode R/W1
Trend offln LRV R/W1
Trend offln URV R/W1
Time display R/W1
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Device information
Device info
Date/Time Ver/Num info
Current date R Transmitter type R
Current time R Option board ID R
Operation time R Trans serial No R/W3
Set date R/W3 Sensor serial No R/W3
Set time R/W3 Main soft rev R
Snsr soft rev R
Order info Ind soft rev R
Tag No R/W3 Hard rev R
Long tag R/W3 Dev id R
Electrode size R/W3
Explosion protection R/W3 IO status
MS code I/O 1 R
Model code R/W3 I/O 2 R
Suffix config 1 R/W3 I/O 3 R
Suffix config 2 R/W3 I/O 4 R
Option 1 R/W3
Option 2 R/W3 Memo
Option 3 R/W3 Memo 1 R/W3
Option 4 R/W3 Memo 2 R/W3
Memo 3 R/W3
RS MS code
Model code R/W3 HART info
Suffix config 1 R/W3 Poll addr R/W3
Suffix config 2 R/W3 Loop curr mode R/W3
Option 1 R/W3 Num req preams R
Option 2 R/W3 Num resp preams R/W3
Option 3 R/W3
Option 4 R/W3
Disp install R/W3
IM 01E21A02-02EN
microSD
microSD
Contents R
Unmount R/W1
Format R/W1
Property
Total space R
Available space R
File system R
IM 01E21A02-02EN
6.2 HART Communication Menu Tree

The outline of the HART communication menu structure is shown below.
R ead only
R
R/W Read and write possible
Symbol(G) Only available for AXG, not for AXW
Online
Process variables root menu →Page 227
Dynamic variables
Device variables
Device variables status
Totalizer count
View outputs
View inputs
Diagnostic root menu →Page 228

Status/Self test
Diagnosis
Maintenance root menu →Page 231

Time stamp
Test
Autozero
AO/AI trim
High/Low alarm configuration
Verification
Param bkup/restore
Data logging
Display indication
Device root menu →Page 233

Easy setup wizard
Basic setup
Detailed setup
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Process variables root menu

Process variables root
menu
Device variables
Dynamic variables
status
[PV] R Velocity data quality R
[PV] data quality R Velocity limit status R
[PV] limit status R Volume flow data quality R
PV % rnge R Volume flow limit status R
Range information R Mass flow data quality R
[SV] R Mass flow limit status R
[SV] data quality R Totalizer1 data quality R
[SV] limit status R Totalizer1 limit status R
[TV] R Totalizer2 data quality R
[TV] data quality R Totalizer2 limit status R
[TV] limit status R Totalizer3 data quality R
[QV] R Totalizer3 limit status R
[QV] data quality R Flow noise data quality(G) R
[QV] limit status R Flow noise limit status(G) R
PV is R Calorific value data quality(G) R
SV is R Calorific value limit status(G) R
TV is R
QV is R Totalizer count
Change PV map Totalizer1 count R
Change SV map Totalizer2 count R
Change TV map Totalizer3 count R
Change QV map
View outputs
Device variables AO1 current R
Disp flowrate R Range information R
Disp flowrate% R AO2 current(G) R
Velocity R
Volume flow R View inputs(G)
Mass flow R AI current R
Totalizer1 R
Totalizer2 R
Totalizer3 R
Flow noise(G) R
Calorific value(G) R
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Diagnostic root menu

Diagnostic root
menu
Status/Self test →Page 229
Alarm/Event device status
Alarm
Condensed status map
Device reset
Burn out R
Reset cfg chng flag
Self test
Diagnosis
Diagnostic output R/W
Diagnostic Exe
Adhesion
Adhesion function R/W
Adhesion level 1 R/W
Result
Adhesion value R
Adhesion status R
Adhesion check cycle R/W
Flow noise(G)
Flow noise function R/W
Flow noise level 1 R/W
Result
Flow noise value R
Flow noise status R
Flow noise damping R/W

Flow noise span R/W
Conductivity(G)
Low conductivity
R/W
function
Conductivity low limit R/W
Result
Conductivity value R
Empty
Electrode voltage A R
Electrode voltage B R
Result
Empty status R
Coil insulation threshold R/W

IEX compare R
V peak hold value(G) R
IEX coil resistance R
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Status/Self test
Status/Self
test
Alarm/Event Condensed
device status status map
Device status R Device status R/W
Status group 0 R Status group 0 R/W
Ext dev status R Ext dev status R/W
Device Diagnostic
R Device Diagnostic Status 0 R/W
Status 0
Device Diagnostic
R Device Diagnostic Status 1 R/W
Status 1
AO saturated R AO saturated R/W
I/O and Subdevice Status R I/O and Subdevice Status R/W
WirelessHART Status R WirelessHART Status R/W
AO fixed R AO fixed R/W
Reset condensed status map
Alarm
Alarm record mask
Alarm record mask 1 R/W Device reset
Alarm record mask 2 R/W Burn out R
Alarm record mask 3 R/W Reset cfg chng flag
Self test
Alarm record
Alarm record 1 R
Alarm record time 1 R
Alarm record 2 R
Alarm record 3 R
Alarm record 4 R
Alarm out mask

Alarm out mask 1 R/W
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Device status Status group 0 Status group 1
Process applied to the primary variable is outside the operating limits of the field device 10:Main board CPU failure 14:Sensor board failure
Process applied to the non-primary variable is outside the operating limits of the field
11:Reverse calculation failure 15:Sensor communication error
device
PV Analog Channel Saturated 12:Main board EEPROM failure 16:A/D1 failure[Signal]
PV Analog Channel Fixed 13:Main board EEPROM default 17:A/D2 failure[Exciter]
Field device has more status available 18:Coil open
A reset or self test of the field device has occurred, or power has been removed and
19:Coil short
reapplied
A modification has been made to the configuration of the field device 20:Exciter failure
Field device has malfunctioned due to a hardware error or failure
Status group 2 Status group 3 Status group 4 Status group 5

21:PWM1 stop 27:Parameter restore incomplete 50:Signal overflow 60:Span configuration error
22:PWM2 stop 28:Indicator board failure 51:Empty pipe detection 61:PV flow select configuration error
23:Option board mismatch 29:Indicator board EEPROM failure 52:H/L or HH/LL alarm 62:Analog output 1 4-20mA limit error
24:Option board EEPROM failure 30:LCD driver failure 53:Adhesion over level 4 63:Analog output 2 4-20mA limit error
25:Option board A/D failure 31:Indicator board mismatch 64:Analog output 1 multi range error
26:Option board SPI failure 32:Indicator communication error 65:H/L HH/LL configuration error
33:microSD failure 66:Density configuration error
Ext dev status Device Diagnostic Status 0 Device Diagnostic Status 1 AO saturated
Maintenance required Simulation Active Status Simulation Active Secondary Analog Channel Saturated
Device variable alert Non-Volatile memory failure Discrete Variables Simulation Active Tertiary Analog Channel Saturated
Critical Power Failure Volatile memory error Event Notification Overflow Quaternary Analog Channel Saturated
Failure Watchdog reset executed Quinary Analog Channel Saturated
Out of Specification Voltage conditions out of range
Function Check Environmental conditions out of range
Electronic failure
Device Configuration Locked
I/O and Subdevice Status WirelessHART Status AO fixed Status group 14

Subdevice list changed Capacity Denied Secondary Analog Channel Fixed 67:Pulse output 1 configuration error
Duplicate master detected Bandwidth allocation pending Tertiary Analog Channel Fixed 68:Pulse output 2 configuration error
Subdevice mismatch Block Transfer Pending Quaternary Analog Channel Fixed 69:Nominal size configuration error
Subdevices with duplicate IDs found Radio Failure Quinary Analog Channel Fixed 70:Adhesion configuration error
Stale data notice 71:Flow noise configuration error
72:Data logging not started
Status group 15 Status group 16 Status group 17 Status group 18

80:Analog output 1 saturated 87:Adhesion over level 3 95:Simulation active 101:Parameter restore running
81:Analog output 2 saturated 88:Low conductivity warning 96:Analog output 1 fixed 102:Display over warning
82:Pulse output 1 saturated 89:Insulation detection 97:Analog output 2 fixed 103:microSD card size warning
83:Pulse output 2 saturated 90:Flow noise over level 3 98:Pulse output 1 fixed 104:Parameter backup incomplete
84:Analog input saturated 91:Flow noise over level 4 99:Pulse output 2 fixed 105:microSD card mismatch
85:Cable misconnect 92:Autozero warning 100:Analog input fixed 106:microSD card removal procedure error
86:Coil insulation warning 93:Verification warning
131:Transmitter type mismatch 94:Factory noise warning
Status group 19 Status group 20

120:Watchdog 130:Device ID not entered
121:Power off
122:Instant power failure
123:Parameter backup running
124:Data logging running
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Maintenance root menu

Maintenance root menu
Time stamp
Current Date R/W
Current Time R/W
Operation time R
Set Date/Time
Test →Page 232
Autozero
Autozero Exe
Result
Zero value R/W
AO/AI trim
AO trim
AO1 Trim
AO2 Trim
Clear D/A trim 1
Clear D/A trim 2
AI trim(G)
AI Trim
Clear AI trim
High/Low alarm configuration
Low alarm R/W
Low low alarm R/W
High alarm R/W
High high alarm R/W
Hi/Lo alarm hysteresis R/W
Verification →Page 232
Param bkup/restore
Factory backup name R
Factory backup date R
SD backup name R/W
Backup Exe
Restore Exe
Backup name 1 R/W
Backup date 1 R/W
Backup name 2 R/W
Backup date 2 R/W
Backup name 3 R/W
Backup date 3 R/W
Data logging
File name R/W
Interval time R/W
Start date R
Start time R
End time R/W
Logging Exe R/W
Log1 select R/W
Log2 select R/W
Log3 select R/W
Log4 select R/W
Display indication
LCD test R/W
Squawk
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Test
Test
Release time R/W
Test mode R/W
Input test
Velocity R/W
Volume flow R/W
Mass flow R/W
Calorific value(G) R/W
AI(G) R/W
SI3 R/W
Output test
Loop test
AO1 R/W
Pulse1 R/W
SO1 R/W
AO2(G) R/W
Pulse2 R/W
SO2 R/W
SO3 R/W
Device variable simulation

Device status bit simulation
Test 2 mode R/W
Test 2 output value R/W
z Verification
Verification
VF target select R/W
Diagnostic output R/W
VF mode R/W
Verification Exe
VF No R/W
Result
VF check result R
VF operation time R
Magnetic circuit result R
Excitation circuit result R
Calculation circuit result R
VF device status result R
Connection status result R
IM 01E21A02-02EN
Device root menu

Device root menu
Easy setup wizard
Volume flow
Volume flow damping AO/frequency R/W
Volume flow damping pulse/total R/W
Volume flow unit R/W
Time unit R/W
Volume flow span R/W
Pulse/Status out1
Pulse1 rate unit R/W
Pulse1 rate value R/W
Frequency1 at 0% R/W
Display setting
Display select1 R/W
Display select2 R/W
Display select3 R/W
Autozero Exe
Basic setup
PV flow select R/W
Velocity check R/W
Velocity
Velocity unit R/W
Velocity span R/W
Velocity damping AO/frequency R/W
Velocity damping pulse/total R/W
Volume flow
Time unit R/W
Mass flow
Mass flow unit R/W
Time unit R/W
Mass flow span R/W
Mass flow damping AO/frequency R/W
Mass flow damping pulse/total R/W
Calorie(G)
Calorific unit R/W
Time unit R/W
Calorific flow span R/W
Calorific value damping AO/frequency R/W
Calorific value damping pulse/total R/W
Specific heat R/W
Sensor
Low MF R/W
High MF R/W
Flow sensor select R/W
Nominal size unit R/W
Nominal size R/W
User span
User span select AO1 R/W
User unit AO1 R/W
User span AO1 R/W
User unit AO2 R/W
User span AO2 R/W
Autozero
Autozero Exe
Zero value R/W
Detailed setup →Page 234
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Detailed setup
Detailed setup
Process variables →Page 235
Sensor
Low MF R/W
High MF R/W
Flow sensor select R/W
Nominal size unit R/W
Nominal size R/W
User span
User unit AO1 R/W
User span AO1 R/W
User span select AO2(G) R/W
User unit AO2(G) R/W
User span AO2(G) R/W
Totalizer →Page 236
Pulse/Status →Page 237
Analog output/input →Page 238
Multi range
Forward span 2 R/W
Reverse span 1 R/W
Reverse span 2 R/W
Auto range hyst R/W
Bi direction hyst R/W
AUX calculation
Flow direction R/W
Rate limit R/W
Dead time R/W
Noise filter R/W
Pulsing flow R/W
Power synchronize R/W
Set power frequency R/W
IEX power frequency R
Measured power
R
frequency
Set SIL R/W
Display →Page 238
Device information →Page 239
Protection
Write protect R
Enable write 10min
New password
Software seal R
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Process variables
Process variables
PV flow select R/W
Velocity check R/W
Velocity
Velocity unit R/W
Velocity span R/W
Velocity damping AO/frequency R/W
Velocity damping pulse/total R/W
Volume flow
Time unit R/W
Mass flow
Mass flow unit R/W
Time unit R/W
Mass flow span R/W
Mass flow damping AO/frequency R/W
Mass flow damping pulse/total R/W
Calorie(G)
Calorific unit R/W
Time unit R/W
Calorific flow span R/W
Calorific value damping AO/frequency R/W
Calorific value damping pulse/total R/W
Specific heat R/W
Density
Density value select(G) R/W
Density unit R/W
Density fixed value R/W
Standard density(G) R/W
Correct density(G) R
Temperature(G)
Standard temperature R/W
Measured temperature R
Calorific fix temp R/W
Temp coef A1 R/W
Temp coef A2 R/W
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Totalizer
Totalizer
Totalizer1
Total1 unit R
Total1 conv factor R/W
Total1 low cut R/W
Total1 fail opts R/W
Total1 options R/W
Total1 Start/Stop R/W
Total1 Reset/Preset
Total1 preset value R/W
Total1 set point R/W
Total 1 count unit R/W
Totalizer2
Total2 unit R/W
Total2 low cut R/W
Total2 options R/W
Total2 Reset/Preset
Totalizer3
Total3 unit R/W
Total3 low cut R/W
Total3 options R/W
Total3 Reset/Preset
Totalizer reset mode R/W
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Pulse/Status
Pulse/Status
Pulse/Status output 1
Pulse1 output mode R/W
Pulse1 active mode R/W
Pulse1 fix width R/W
Pulse1 low cut R/W
Pulse1 alarm out R/W
Status output1 function R/W
Pulse1 option R/W
Pulse/Status output 2
Pulse2 active pulse R/W
Pulse2 output mode R/W
Pulse2 select R/W
Pulse2 active mode R/W
Pulse2 fix width R/W
Pulse2 low cut R/W
Pulse2 alarm out R/W
Pulse2 option R/W
Status output 3(G)

Status output3 active mode R/W
Status input 3
Status input3 active mode R/W
Status input3 function R/W
Status input3 state R/W
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Analog output/input
Analog output/input
Analog output 1 Analog input(G)
AO1 low cut R/W AI function R/W
AO1 high limit R/W AI high limit R/W
AO1 low limit R/W AI low limit R/W
AO1 alarm out R/W AI current R
AO1 range mode R/W AI unit R/W
AI URV R/W
Analog output 2(G) AI LRV R/W
AO2 select R/W
AO2 low cut R/W
AO2 high limit R/W
AO2 low limit R/W
AO2 alarm out R/W
z Display
Display
Line select Display operation
Display select1 R/W configuration
Display select2 R/W Display contrast R/W
Display select3 R/W Display line R/W
Display select4 R/W Display period R/W
Display select5 R/W Display NE107 R/W
Display select6 R/W Display alarm R/W
Display select7 R/W Display scroll R/W
Display select8 R/W Display damping R/W
Display format date R/W
Trend select Display inversion R/W
Trend select 1 R/W Language R/W
Trend select 2 R/W Language package R
Trend select 3 R/W Display measure mode R/W
Trend select 4 R/W Trend offline lrv R/W
Trend offline urv R/W
Display format Display installation R/W
Display format PV R/W IRSW operation R/W
Display format total 1 R/W Display time R/W
Display format total 2 R/W
Display format total 3 R/W
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Device information
Device information
Order information
Tag R/W
Long tag R/W
Electrode size R/W
Explosion protection R/W
Basic model code R/W
Suffix config 1 R/W
Suffix config 2 R/W
Option 1 R/W
Option 2 R/W
Option 3 R/W
Option 4 R/W
Remote sensor basic model code R/W
Remote sensor suffix config 1 R/W
Remote sensor suffix config 2 R/W
Remote sensor option 1 R/W
Version/Number information
Transmitter type R
Option board ID R
Transmitter serial No R/W
Sensor serial No R/W
Main board revision R
Sensor board revision R
Indicator board revision R
Hardware rev R
Dev id R
IO Status
IO1 R
IO2 R
IO3 R
IO4 R
Memo
Memo 1 R/W
Memo 2 R/W
Memo 3 R/W
HART setup
Poll addr R/W
Loop current mode R/W
Num req preams R
Num resp preams R/W
Manufacturer R
Model R
Date R/W
Descriptor R/W
Message R/W
Distributor R
Final asmbly num R/W
Max dev vars R
Device Profile R
Universal rev R
Fld dev rev R
Software rev R
Hardware rev R
PV unit R/W
Burst setup →Page 240
Event setup →Page 241
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Burst setup
Burst setup
Stop burst
Easy burst setup
Set easy burst
Stop easy burst
Burst mode R
Burst Command R
slot0 R
slot1 R
slot2 R
slot3 R
Detailed burst setup

set Detailed Burst
stop Detailed Burst
BM1 Setting
Burst mode R
Burst Command R
slot0 R
slot1 R
slot2 R
slot3 R
slot4 R
slot5 R
slot6 R
slot7 R
Update Period R
Max Update Period R
Burst Msg Trigger Mode R
Burst Trigger Class R
Burst Trigger Units R
Burst Trigger Level R
BM2 Setting
Burst mode R
Burst Command R
slot0 R
slot1 R
slot2 R
slot3 R
slot4 R
slot5 R
slot6 R
slot7 R
UpdatePeriod R
Max Update Period R
BM3 Setting
Burst mode R
Burst Command R
slot0 R
slot1 R
slot2 R
slot3 R
slot4 R
slot5 R
slot6 R
slot7 R
UpdatePeriod R
Max Update Period R
IM 01E21A02-02EN
z Event setup
Event setup
set Event
stop Event
acknowledge Event
Event Setting
Event Notification Control R
Event Notification Retry Time R
Max Update Time R
Event Debounce Interval R
Event Status R
Time First unack Event Triggered R
Device Status Mask R
Ext dev status Mask R
Device Diagnostic Status 0 Mask R
AO fixed Mask R
AO saturated Mask R
Device Specific Status 0 Mask R
IM 01E21A02-02EN
242
Revision Information
 Title : ADMAG TI Series AXG, AXW Magnetic Flowmeter HART Communication Type
 Manual No. : IM 01E21A02-02EN
Edition Date Page Revised Item

1st Nov. 2020 — New publication
2nd Mar. 2021 14 2.2.1 Correction of errors.
117 4.8.6 Correction of errors.
141, 142 4.11.6 Correction of errors.
225, 228, 232 6.2 Correction of errors.
3rd Dec. 2021 31 3.6.1 Add the description of process variable setting.
137 4.11.2 Add NOTE, and the description of setting procedure.
160 4.13.3 Correction of errors.
4th Mar. 2023 45 4.1.5 Add NOTE.
48 4.1.7 Add NOTE.
86 4.6.4 Add NOTE.
IM 01E21A02-02EN

Im01e21a02 02en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Im01e21a02 02en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Im01e21a02 02en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User’s

Manual ADMAG TI Series

4th Edition: Mar. 2023 IM 01E21A02-02EN

 Precautions Related to the Protection, Safety, and Alteration of the

Functional grounding terminal

 Regarding This User’s Manual

1.1 For Safe Use of Product

2. Operation by Display unit

2.1 Basic Operating Procedures

2.2 Display and Basic Configuration

2.2.1 Display Configuration

00 : 00 Status icon and time (Current time / Operation days)

(1) Basic operation of IR switches

(3) Data indication part

2.2.2 Operation Level

A pass code can be configured only from the display.

2.3 Display Mode and Setting Mode

2) Touch [SFT] + [INC] switches.

SET SFT INC

4) Touch [SET] switch.

SET SFT INC

6) The screen moves to the menu of Operation Level.

The alphanumeric type displays the following alphanumeric characters in order.

2.4 Parameter Setting from Display Panel

2.4.1 Setting Example of Select Type Parameter (Flow rate

00 : 00 Specify the physical unit for volumetric flow rate.

00 : 00 Specify the time unit for volumetric flow rate.

2.4.2 Setting Example of Numeric Type Parameter (Flow rate

00 : 00 Specify the flow rate span unit.

2.4.3 Setting Example of Alphanumeric Type Parameter (Tag

00 : 00 Specify the Tag No..

2.5 microSD Card Insertion/Removal

(1) Insertion of microSD Card

Figure 2.5 Insertion of microSD Card

(2) Removal of microSD Card

3. Operation with HART Configuration

3.1 Connecting HART Configuration Tool

Figure 3.1 Connecting the HART Configuration Tool

3.2 HART Configuration Tool and Device

3.2.1 Device Description (DD) and Device Revision

The device revision of the DD file is given in hexadecimal.

• Confirmation of Device revision

3.2.2 Device Type Manager (DTM) and Device Revision

The DTM revision can be confirmed with “DTM setup”.

3.3 Basic Setup

 Tag No. (Tag, Long tag)

 Device information (Descriptor, Message, Date)

SP ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /

* “SP” indicates a space.

3.4 Parameter Configuration

3.5 Data Renewing and Upload/Download

(2) Upload/Download Function

Tag Total1 options Display select7

3.6 Specific Functions of HART Configuration

*: Only available for AXG, not for AXW

This setting can be configured with the following method.

3.6.2 Burst Mode

Burst Message Burst Trigger

• Setting Easy Burst Mode

Precautions Related to the Protection, Safety, and Alteration of the

Regarding This User’s Manual

Tag No. (Tag, Long tag)

Device information (Descriptor, Message, Date)

Pulse output, Frequency output, and Status output

Analog output/Analog input

Multi range function

Auxiliary calculation function

Backup, Restore, and Duplicate of Parameter

Software write protection function

Flow rate (PV)

Flow velocity, Volumetric flow rate, Mass flow rate, Calorie

Analog output/Frequency output

Using user span

User unit setting

Execution of zero adjustment

Confirmation of zero adjustment result

Displaying totalized value

Setting totalizer reset mode

Use of the reset/preset function

Preset value setting